ORION Commercial 'LULA' Elevator - Advanced Lift Solutions

ORION 

Commercial ‘LULA’ Elevator 

INSTALLATION and SERVICE 

MANUAL 

© 2010 Savaria Corporation 

PN 000581 (Rev 18-m06-2010) 

(To Be Retained by Authorized Savaria Dealer)

Technical Documentation Modifications and Additions 

Orion Commercial ‘LULA’ Elevator Installation and Service Manual (PN 000581, Rev. 18-m06-2010) 

Note: Modifications between revisions are marked M; additions between revisions are marked A. 

Section Details 

Section 5.9, page 60 

Added detailed drawing of hardware for overspeed 

governor cable tensioner assembly 

Section 5.11, page 63 Updated Tape Reader installation section M 

Section 8.1, page 106 Updated Pro-Auto Door Operator installation section M 

Appendix C 

IMPORtANt 

the following details and provided documents replace or augment the published manuals 

and schematics. the most recent engineering changes and enhancements are reflected in 

the notes below. 

Updated Virginia PLC Controller information to reflect 

latest version 

PN# 301405 ©Savaria Concord Lifts Inc. 

1 of 1 

M 

M

1 

8 

15 

22 

31 

Install Rails and Rail Brackets 

Manual Ref. Sect. 3.1, pg. 18 

Estimated Time 8 hrs 

Completed? 

Install Hydraulic Piping and 

Overspeed Valve OR Hose 

Manual Ref. Sect. 5.0-5.1, 

pg. 45-47 

Estimated Time 0.5 - 4 hrs 

Completed? 

Install Halfway Junction Box 


pg. 93 

Estimated Time 15 mins. 

Completed? 

Connect Wiring at Hoistway 

Junction Box 

Manual Ref. Sect. 7.4 pg. 95 


Completed? 

Install Travelling Cables 


Estimated Time 0.5 hrs 

Completed? 

2 

Time dependant on 

distance between hoistway 

and machine room & on 

hose or hard piping req’s 

16 

23 

Assemble Split Cylinder IF 

Required 



Completed? 

9 

Install Tape & Tape Reader 



Install Entrance Frames & Doors 


or 2 Speed Door Manual 

Estimated Time 4 - 8 hrs 

32 

Completed? 

Completed? 

Time dependant on number 

of landings and/or doors & 

operators 

Connect Temporary 

Run Buttons 


Connect Controller and 

COP Electrical Wiring 


Completed? 


& Appendix A 


Completed? 

Install Jack Unit and Upstand 


Estimated Time 1 hr 

Completed? 

Bleed Cylinder 



Completed? 

Orion Commercial ‘LULA’ Elevator Step-by-Step Installation Guide 

Refer to Orion Commercial ‘LULA’ Elevator Installation and Service Manual Part Number 000581 

3 

17 

10 

Position Floor Magnets 



Completed? 

Hoistway Entrance Door 

33 

Type? 

Program the PLC 

24 

25 

Manual Ref. Appendix C, 


Completed? 

4 

18 

Install Bumpers OR Buffers 



Completed? 

11 

Install Limit Switches 

and Cams 



Completed? 

Assemble & Plumb 

Entrance Frames (2 Spd.) 

Refer to 2 Speed Door Manual 


Completed? 

Secure Pro-Door Assembly 

& Wire Operator if req’d 

Manual Ref. Sect. 8.1 pg. 106 


Completed? 

34 

Install Aircraft Cable 



Completed? 

Power ON and Test Elevator 

Manual Ref. Sect. 7.8 & 12, 

pg. 103 & 131 


Completed? 

Time 

dependant 

on number 

of landings 

5 

19 

26 

27 

Assemble Sling 



Completed? 

12 

Install & Wire Pit Switch 


Estimated Time 4 to 8 hrs 

Completed? 

Secure Door Panels to 

35 

Header & Plumb 


Estimated Time 2-8 hrs 

Completed? 

Adjust Pro-Lock 

& Door Closure if req’d 

Adjust Roping Position 



Completed? 


Estimated Time 1- 2 hrs 

Completed? 

Check Working Pressure 

w/Slack Rope Monitor Valve 

6 

20 



Completed? 

Fill Oil Reservoir 



Completed? 

13 

Install utility boxes for 

landing stations & hoistway wiring 

Site Dependant (est. 1 hr) 

Completed? 

28 

36 

Install Platform 



Completed? 

2 Speed Doors are only installed with 

2 Speed Operators 

Cab Assembly 

Demonstrate the operation of the elevator to the 

customer, provide dealer information in the Owner’s 

Manual and warranty details as necessary. 

7 

Time dependant on 

distance between hoistway 

and machine room 



Completed? 

Pro- Doors are only installed with Pro-Locks & 

Auto Gate Operators 

Set Over Pressure Relief Valve 

Manual Ref. Sect. 10.1, 

pg. 115 


Completed? 

NOTE 

Mount Controller on Tank 

and Connect Main Power Supply 

Manual Ref. Sect. 4.0 & 7.2, 

TSSA Test Redundancy Circuit 

(Ontario, Canada ONLY) 

Manual Ref. Sect. 15, 

pg. 133 


Completed? 

Tasks are shown sequentially for convenience. Experienced teams can complete many steps in parallel, reducing the overall installation time. 

38 

pg. 44 & 93 


Completed? 

14 

21 

37 

Set Safety Brake, Install Pit Prop 

& Overspeed Governor 


pg. 55-59 


Completed? 

Run Wiring between 

Landing Station to Controller 



29 

30 

Completed? 

2 Speed Doors & 

2 Speed Door Operator 



Auto-Gate & Porta-Gate Operator 

Manual Ref. Sect. 6.4 - 6.5, 

Adjust Valve Speeds 

Manual Ref. Sect. 10.6-11.2 

pg. 123-130 


Completed? 

Completed? 

pg. 76-81 


Completed?

IMPORTANT 

This Orion Commercial “LU/LA” Elevator should be installed, maintained and 

serviced by authorized Savaria dealers only. 

The authorized Savaria dealer should refer to this manual for installation, 

maintenance, service and repair instructions. 

The owner is responsible for ensuring the ongoing safe operating condition of the 

Orion Elevator through proper maintenance and service. An inspection check or 

service call should be performed on a regular basis every six to twelve months by 

an authorized Savaria dealer (or as frequently as required by local jurisdiction). 

This manual should be retained by the Dealer for future reference. On completion 

of the installation, the dealer MUST provide the owner with the information below 

and ensure that it is recorded in the Owner’s Manual. 

Customer Name: 

Installing Dealer: 

Dealer’s Telephone Number: 

Date Installed: 

Serial/Job Number: 

Orion Installation Guide 

PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

FOR OWNER’S RECORDS 

1 of 145 

o r i o n co m m e r c i a l ‘l u l a’ e l e vato r

o r i o n co m m e r c i a l ‘l u l a’ e l e vat o r 

2 of 145 

TABLE Of CONTENTS 

IMPORTANT 1 

1.0 PRE-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND NOTES 6 

1.1 INTRODUCTION 7 

1.2 GENERAL SPECIfICATIONS 8 

1.3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED 9 

1.4 ELEVATOR TERMINOLOGY 10 

2.0 INSTALLATION SAfETY TIPS 12 

2.1 PRELIMINARY CHECKS 13 

3.0 INITIAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 14 

3.1 RAIL INSTALLATION wITH SPEEDY JIG 18 

3.2 SPLIT CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (If EQUIPPED) 26 

3.2.1 Plunger Assembly 26 

3.2.2 Cylinder Barrel Assembly 27 

3.2.3 Split Cylinder Sanding 28 

3.3 JACK UNIT AND UPSTAND INSTALLATION 30 

3.4 SHEAVE/GUIDE YOKE INSTALLATION 33 

3.5 LIfT CHANNEL UPRIGHTS (STILES) AND SLING 35 

3.5.1 Stile Retainer Bracket Installation 39 

3.6 CAR TOP PROP INSTALLATION 39 

3.7 BUMPERS AND BUffERS 42 

4.0 CONNECTING THE POwER SUPPLY 44 

5.0 HYDRAULIC INSTALLATION 45 

5.0.1 filling the Reservoir 46 

5.1 OVERSPEED VALVE INSTALLATION AND TESTING 47 

5.1.1 Testing Instructions 48 

5.2 TEMPORARY RUN BUTTON INSTALLATION 50 

5.3 BLEEDING AIR fROM THE CYLINDER 51 

5.4 ROPING POSITION 52 

5.5 CABLE INSTALLATION 53 

5.6 PIT PROP 55 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

5.7 PLATfORM INSTALLATION 56 

5.8 SETTING THE SAfETIES 58 

5.9 OVERSPEED GOVERNOR 59 

5.10 PIT SwITCH INSTALLATION 62 

5.11 TAPE READER 63 

5.12 LIMIT SwITCH/fLOOR ZONE 66 

6.0 CAB ASSEMBLY 68 

6.1 CAR OPERATING PANEL (COP) INSTALLATION 73 

6.2 LIGHT CURTAIN INSTALLATION 74 

6.3 AUTOMATIC CAB LIGHTING 76 

6.4 CAB GATE INSTALLATION (If EQUIPPED) 76 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

6.4.1 Gate Lock Channel 80 

6.5 PORTA - GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION 81 

6.6 PORTA - GATE OPERATOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 83 

6.7 PORTA - GATE TROUBLESHOOTING 87 

6.8 DUPLINE BOARD PROGRAMMING 

fOR DOOR AND GATE OPERATORS 88 

6.9 CTIS INSTALLATION 89 

6.9.1 2-Speed Door Operator Configuration 89 

6.9.2 Cab Gate and Swing Pro-Door Configuration 90 

7.0 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 92 

7.1 HOISTwAY JUNCTION BOx INSTALLATION 93 

7.2 HOISTwAY JUNCTION BOx CONNECTIONS 93 

7.3 TRAVELLING CABLES 94 

7.4 CONTROLLER LAYOUT AND wIRING 95 

7.4.1 Selecting the Controller Location and Environment 96 

7.4.2 Controller Grounding 97 

7.4.3 Machine Room Connections 97 

7.5 LANDING CONNECTIONS 100 

7.6 TERMINATION Of wIRING AT CONTROLLER 101 

7.7 CAR STATION CONNECTIONS 102 

7.8 POwER UP AND TEST THE ELEVATOR 103 

3 of 145 



8.0 INSTALLATION Of fIRE RATED PRO-DOORS 104 

4 of 145 

8.1 PRO- AUTO DOOR OPERATOR i INSTALLATION 106 

8.1.1 Operator Adjustment 106 

8.1.2 Electrical Installation 108 

8.1.3 Potentiometer (POT) Adjustments 109 

8.1.4 Setting the Cams 111 

9.0 PRO-LOCK INSTALLATION 112 

9.1 PRO-LOCK OPERATION 112 

9.2 PRO-LOCK ADJUSTMENT 112 

9.3 ELECTRICAL CONTACTS ADJUSTMENT 113 

10.0 ADJUSTING AND SETTING THE EPV VALVE 115 

10.1 SETTING THE OVER PRESSURE RELIEf VALVE 115 

10.2 PRESSURE GAUGE 120 

10.3 SLACK ROPE MONITOR VALVE 120 

10.4 LOw PRESSURE SwITCH 122 

10.5 SEQUENCE Of OPERATION Of THE EPV VALVE 122 

10.6 DETERMINING SPEEDS 123 

10.6.1 Set Speed without a Tachometer 123 

10.7 SPEED SETTING DESCRIPTIONS 125 

11.0 PROGRAMMING THE VALVE 126 

11.1 SETTING SPEED 128 

11.2 ERROR MESSAGES 130 

11.3 EPV MAINTENANCE 130 

12.0 TESTING OPERATION 131 

13.0 AUTOMATIC CAB LIGHTING 132 

14.0 BEfORE LEAVING THE JOB SITE 132 

15.0 TEST REDUNDANCY CIRCUIT (TSSA, ONTARIO ONLY) 133 

15.1 REDUNDANCY BACK-UP 

TESTING wITH fIREMAN SERVICE 133 

15.2 REDUNDANCY BACK-UP 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

APPENDIx A ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS (shipped separately) 

APPENDIx B PARTS LIST B-1 

APPENDIx C VIRGINIA PLC CONTROLLER C-1 

1.0 PRE-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND NOTES C-2 

2.0 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND wIRING C-3 

3.0 START-UP INSTRUCTIONS C-4 

4.0 fINAL ADJUSTMENTS C-9 

5.0 MICRO-PROCESSOR HARDwARE DESCRIPTION C-13 

6.0 SETUP GUIDE fOR PROGRAMMING THE ALLEN BRADLEY PLC C-18 

7.0 CONTROLLER NOMENCLATURE C-26 

8.0 PARTS LIST C-27 

9.0 CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS USING DAT C-28 

10.0 TROUBLESHOOTING SUGGESTIONS C-48 

11.0 DUPLINE SYSTEM: ENTERING CALLS fROM THE CONTROLLER C-51 

12.0 I/O BOARD REPLACEMENT C-52 

13.0 CONTROLLER MAINTENANCE C-57 

14.0 fREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS C-58 

APPENDIx D CAB TYPES & GATE HANDING D-1 

APPENDIx E HANDS fREE TELEPHONE PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS E-1 

APPENDIx f ORION CAB ASSEMBLY HARDwARE PRE-PACK f-1 

APPENDIx G NEw JERSEY fIRE SERVICE SwITCH wIRING G-1 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

5 of 145 



1.0 PRE-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND NOTES 

General Notes 

Important information is highlighted by the headings WARNING, CAUTION, or NOTE. These 

words are defined as follows: 

wARNING Warnings are used to indicate instructions, which if not followed correctly, will 

likely result in personal injury or substantial damage to equipment. 

CAUTION Cautions are used to indicate instructions or information, which if no observed, 

may result in some damage to equipment if care is not taken. 

NOTE Notes are used to indicate instructions or information which is especially helpful 

in understanding and operating the equipment, and which will usually speed up 

the installation process. 

Important Precautions and Notes 

The following general rules and safety precautions must be observed for safe and reliable 

operation of your system. 

The elevator controller must be installed by experienced field 

Warninginstallation personnel. The field installation personnel must know 

and follow all the rules and regulations pertaining to the safe installation and running of 

elevators. Additional information for specific devices (such as the valves, door operator, 

etc.) is the responsibility of the manufacturers of those devices. 

This equipment is designed and built to comply with ANSI A17.1 

Warning and National Electrical Code and must be installed by a qualified 

contractor. It is the responsibility of the contractor to make sure that the final installation 

complies with all applicable local, state and national codes, and is installed safely. 

The AC power supply to this equipment must come from a fused 

Warningdisconnect switch or circuit breaker which is sized in accordance 

with all applicable national, state and local electrical codes, in order to provide the 

necessary overload protection for the controller and motor. Incorrect motor branch circuit 

protection may create a hazardous condition. 

6 of 145 

IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT YOU READ AND fULLY 

UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL BEfORE BEGINNING 

THE INSTALLATION Of THE ORION ELEVATOR. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

1.1 INTRODUCTION 

This manual contains installation and service instructions for the Orion Commercial “LULA” 

Elevator. We have spent much time and effort ensuring these instructions provide for a safe 

and efficient installation. Please follow these instructions exactly and call us immediately if 

you have any problems or need assistance. 

Please be certain you follow our installation instructions and do not try to “cut any corners”, 

eliminate any installation steps or modify the Orion Commercial “LULA” Elevator. It is 

important for your customer’s safety that the installation is thorough and correct. The best 

way to ensure this margin of safety is by following our installation instructions. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

Any preparatory work such as finishing electric source, pouring concrete 

base or pit, or carpentry, must be done before the unit is installed. 

HELP LINE 

If you have any questions that are not covered in this manual, please contact our Technical 

Support Department for assistance. Please have the following information available before 

calling to receive the fastest service possible: 

• Job Number 

• Job Name 

• Location 

• Product Type 

• Initial or Follow-up Visit 

• Brief Description of Problem 

• Call Back Number 

Savaria Corporation 

107 Alfred Kuehne Blvd. 

Brampton, Ontario, Canada L6T 4K3 

Toll Free: (800) 791-7999 

Fax: (905) 791-2222 

THIS SAfETY ALERT SYMBOL INDICATES AN IMPORTANT 

MESSAGE IN THIS MANUAL. wHEN YOU SEE THIS 

SYMBOL, CAREfULLY READ THE MESSAGE AND BE 

ALERT TO THE POSSIBILITY Of CAUSING DAMAGE TO 

THE EQUIPMENT AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY. 

7 of 145 



1.2 GENERAL SPECIfICATIONS 

8 of 145 

SPECIfICATION ORION COMMERCIAL “LULA” ELEVATOR 

Load Capacity 1400 lb (635 kg) 

Rated Speed 30 ft/min (0.15 m/s) (Nominal) 

Power Supply 

208 volt, three phase, 30 amps or 

230 volt, single phase, 50 amps 

Drive System 1:2 Cable Hydraulic 

Cab Size 

Maximum Travel 25 feet (7.6 m) 

Maximum # of Stops 5 stops 

Pit Depth Required 

Minimum Overhead 

Clearance 

48” Wide x 54” Deep (1220 mm x 1372 mm) or 

42” Wide x 60” Deep (1067 mm x 1524 mm) or 

51” x 51” (1295 mm x 1295 mm) or 54” x 54” (1372 mm x 1372 mm) 

14” (356 mm) Minimum 

96” (2438 mm) Maximum 

120” (3048 mm) - Existing Building 

134” (3404 mm) - New Building 

Control System Single Automatic Push Button 

Floor Selection Magnetic Selector 

Sub-Floor Material ⅛” Masonite over Plywood sub-floor 

Control Panel Finish Stainless Steel or Brass 

Hall Station Finish Stainless Steel or Brass 

Motor 5 HP (3.73 kW) 

Cab Panel Finish 

Steel Cab with Plastic Laminate Finish Walls or Steel Cab with Steel 

Finish Walls 

Lighting Supply 110 volt, 60 cycle, 15 amps 

Door Opening 36” x 80” (890 mm x 2030 mm) nominal 

Standard Features 

Emergency Battery Powered Lowering 

Automatic Emergency Lighting 

Automatic Timed Car Lighting 

Emergency Lowering Valve at Pump 

Anti-Creep Re-Levelling Device 

Slack/Broken Cable Safety Device 

Upper and Lower Limit Switches 

Final Limit Switch 

Stainless Steel Handrail 

Digital Floor Indicator in Cab 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

1.3 TOOLS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED 

o Allen Wrenches (Keys) (⅛" - ⅜" Imperial) 

o Allen Wrenches (Keys) (Metric) 

o Screwdrivers (Slotted and Phillips) 

o Set of Mechanical Sockets and Wrenches (¼" - 1 ¼" Imperial Sizes) 

o 4 foot (1219 mm) Carpenter’s Level and Square 

o ⅜" Reversible Hand Drill (Variable Speed) 

o Carbide Drill Bits, ⅜" (10 mm) and ½" (13 mm) 

o ½" Hammer Drill (for concrete fasteners) 

o Pry Bar 

o Chain Hoist (required for higher travel units), minimum ½ ton capacity 

o Hand Dolly 

o Temporary Run Buttons (refer to Appendix B Parts List) 

o Scratch Point Awl 

o Plumb Bob and Line 

o Chalk Line 

o Tape Measure 

o Wire Tie Wraps 

o Wire Puller (50 feet of ⅛" fish tape) 

o Volt-Ohm Meter (V.O.M.) 

o Stop Watch or Tachometer (to set final speed) 

o Funnel (for filling the oil reservoir) 

o Vise-Grip Pliers (standard and wide jaw welder’s type) 

o Rags and Cleaning Solvent 

o 100 foot (30 m) Extension Cord (Minimum 14 gauge wire) 

o 10" (250 mm) (Medium Cut) File (for filing joints, if required) 

o Scaffolding or ladders and planks for erection of rails and brackets 

o Wire Strippers 

o Temporary Light for hoistway 

o ½" Rope, minimum length to be as long as the hoistway height 

o Rubber Mallet 

o Speedy Jig (refer to Appendix B Parts List) 

o 2 Strap Wrenches for Split Cylinders 

o Lifting Sling (Cable or Nylon Strap of Adequate Strength) 

o Coated Steel Shims, minimum 4" (100 mm) square 

o Wall Anchors 

o 10 Gauge and 14 Gauge Wire for motor and light wiring 

o Assorted Butt Electrical Wire Connectors and Crimping Tool 

o 32 Grade Hydraulic Oil, maximum 20 gallon (will vary depending on travel) 

o ½" Electrical Box Connectors 

o Hoistway Wiring Materials (varies depending on local codes), 20 gauge stranded 

multi-wire cable with 20-28 conductors for connecting the pump controller to the 

travelling cable at the halfway box. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

9 of 145 



1.4 ELEVATOR TERMINOLOGY 

10 of 145 

TERMINOLOGY DESCRIPTION 

Cab This is the compartment of the elevator in which people ride. 

Also, called the car. 

Cable Hydraulic This is the type of drive system used on the Orion. It involves a 

hydraulic jack, wire cable and pulley system to raise and lower 

the cab compartment. 

Car See cab. 

Cab Gate/Door This is a door or gate connected to the cab. Interior gate. 

Control System This is the entire electrical control system, usually identified as 

the “controller” (mounted at the pump unit). 

Cylinder This is the outside tubular casing of the jack. 

D.B.G. This is the Distance Between Guides (Rails) or the critical 

measurement between the face of the left rail and the face of 

the right rail. 

Electro-Mechanical Interlock This is the electrically and mechanically controlled door or gate 

lock that prevents the door/gate from opening when the elevator 

is not present at the landing and prevents the elevator from 

running, unless all doors/gates are closed and locked. 

Guide Yoke/Sheave This is a cable guide arrangement consisting of a sheave, 

guide shoes, roller bearings and adjustable cable guards. The 

sheave is furnished with rounded grooves to fit the cables and 

is mechanically attached to the end of the hydraulic plunger to 

provide the 1:2 mechanical advantage. 

Hoistway/Runway This is the elevator shaft totally enclosing the elevator. 

Hoistway Door This is a door connected to the hoistway at a landing. 

Jack Unit This is the hydraulic piston/plunger and cylinder used to drive 

the elevator cab up and down. 

L.E.D. This is a Light Emitting Diode. 

Landing This is any floor level or access level where passengers will 

enter and/or exit the elevator cab. 

Lift This is another word for elevator. 

Load (Rated) This is the maximum amount of allowable weight that the elevator 

is rated to carry (in persons or lb/kg). 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

TERMINOLOGY DESCRIPTION 

Machine Room This is a separate room usually next to the hoistway to hold the 

hydraulic power unit and motor control system. 

Overhead Clearance This is the vertical clearance required to fit the elevator and its 

drive components at the top floor. It is measured from the upper 

floor level to top of the hoistway. 

Pit This is the bottom area of the hoistway that is below the lowest 

floor level. 

Plunger/Piston This is the rod portion of the hydraulic cylinder that extends from 

the cylinder as hydraulic pressure is applied and is attached to 

the sling. 

Power Unit/Pump Unit This is a hydraulic power producing unit consisting of an electric 

motor, hydraulic pump, valves, and control panel. 

Wire Rope This is lifting wire cable. 

Roped Hydraulic See Cable Installation. 

Safeties This is a mechanical device used to stop and support the elevator 

cab, sling, and rated load if a failure in the normal suspension 

means occurs. 

Sling This is structural steel members that support the elevator cab. 

The sling carries the cab up and down the hoistway. 

Stiles These are vertical support members of the sling assembly. 

Travel This is the distance from the bottom finished floor level to the 

top finished floor level. 

Travelling Cable This is the black flat multi-wire electrical cable connecting the 

elevator control panel in the car to the pump unit, push buttons, 

and safety devices. 

Upstand Post The upstand post is a rigid steel post of varying lengths used to 

support the jack unit. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

11 of 145 



12 of 145 

THE fOLLOwING SAfETY INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE ADHERED 

2.0 INSTALLATION SAfETY TIPS 

The following safety installation tips must always be followed. Please read and understand 

this entire manual before installing the unit and carefully follow all procedures. 

1) Proper, safety-approved protection for your head, eyes, hands, and feet should be worn 

during all phases of the installation. 

2) Use extreme caution while raising the elevator components into position to avoid personal 

injury or damage to the equipment. 

3) Use extreme care when operating units without panels in place to avoid personal injury 

from moving parts. 

4) Power should be removed from the drive unit and operating systems when any electrical 

work or adjustments are being done. 

5) To avoid possible electrical shock, you should not work on a wet floor or enter an elevator 

or elevator pit when it contains water. 

6) Use only recommended anchor fasteners. 

7) Never work alone and always be aware of fellow workers and their safety. 

8) DO NOT wear loose-fitting clothing during installation. Shirt cuffs should be buttoned to 

avoid being caught in moving machinery. 

9) Ensure that all electrical and mechanical equipment is properly enclosed. 

10) Never place yourself in a position where you may be harmed (i.e., between shear points, 

under heavy objects, in the path of moving parts, etc.). 

11) Never stand directly under the cab or inside the hoistway during testing or when power is 

being supplied to the cab itself. 

12) Hoistway doors should be locked or nailed shut any time the area is left unattended. 

13) Always remember and practice, SAfETY fIRST. 

TO AT ALL TIMES. PRACTICE SAfETY fIRST. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

2.1 PRELIMINARY CHECKS 

Pre-Delivery Check 

Carefully check all measurements of the lift hoistway enclosure and compare to the site Installation 

Drawings. Main items to be checked are: 

Items to be checked against site Installation Drawings 

Total travel from the bottom finished floor level to the top finished floor level. 

Clearance overhead. Top finished floor sill to top of the hoistway. 

Measure width and depth of hoistway. Check to ensure hoistway is “square”. 

Pit depth (check for equal depth and level). 

Size and location of the landing door or doors rough openings. 

Location of the machine (pump) room. 

Location of the electrical power disconnect switches. 

Correct voltage, three phase or single and the proper size of wire (assure compliance with local 

codes). 

Ensure the jack unit can be placed in the hoistway (clear access to hoistway/runway). 

Review “Provisions by Others” with site supervisor. 

Check that all walls/barriers surrounding hoistway area are smooth, solid, vertical and 

perpendicular to the floor and walls are square to each other. 

NOTE: It is important walls are perfectly level due to tight running clearances. 

Check oil and electrical line “sleeves” from machine room to hoistway. 

Confirm rail support wall is properly installed with adequate backing as per appropriate 

drawing. 

Pre-Installation Check 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

note 

Checklist 

We strongly recommend that you conduct a before installation check when you receive shipment 

to verify contents for damaged or missing parts. Uncrate all boxes and spread out the parts. 

Carefully check for damages that you must report to your carrier immediately and check for 

missing materials against our shipping list. 

NO CLAIMS FOR SHORTAGE WILL BE ALLOWED UNLESS REPORTED WITHIN 24 

HOURS OF RECEIPT OF SHIPMENT. 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

13 of 145 



3.0 INITIAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 

Placement of the Controller Tank 

The ideal location for the Controller Tank is as close as possible to the hoistway. 

Do not place the Tank in an area where extreme temperature changes may occur during the 

year. It is recommended the power unit be located in an area where temperatures range from 

50° F to 120° F (10° C to 49° C). 

Note that the current design is equipped with the Variable Speed Valve inside the oil tank. Refer 

to Figures 2 and 3 for an inside layout view of the tank. Refer to Section 10 Adjusting and 

Setting the EPV Valve for more details. 

14 of 145 

�� 

�� 

�� 

� 

�� 

� 

figure 1 Typical Arrangement of Controller Tank 

�� 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

IMPORTANT 

The Controller Tank is shipped drained of hydraulic oil and will require filling 

during installation. It is recommended to drain the tank before packing and 

shipping to another location. 

The Tank is also equipped with a lockable access panel. The key must be left 

at the site to allow the owner to gain access to the Manual Lowering Handle. 

Specifications Controller Tank 

Dimensions (inches) H 57” x W 28” x D 17” (PLC) 

Minimum Required Clearance (inches) 39” 

Valve and Manual Lowering Handle Location Inside Tank 

Rupture Valve Test T-fitting factory installed 

Tank to Controller Wiring Quick connect valve and motor wiring 

Controller Layout PLC or Relay Board 

Keyed Lock to Tank Yes 

Machine Room Required No* 

Tank Capacity (gal/ltr) 15-16.5 gal/57-63 ltr 

Max. Dry Weight (lbs/kgs) 147 lbs/55 kg 

Max. Filled Weight (lbs/kgs) 312 lbs/117 kg 

Operating Environment 50°F - 120°F /10°C - 49°C 

Operating Volume 57 dBA 

Controller Tank Features 

• Hydraulic Hose Connection Port on either side of the tank 

• Built in handles on either side of the tank 

* with local jurisdiction approval 

• Isolation mounting of pump motor valve assembly minimizes operating noise 

15 of 145 



16 of 145 

Oil Level 

Dipstick 

Hydraulic Hose 

Connection 

Port 

Shut Off Valve 

Handle in OFF 

position 

Rupture Valve 

Test T-fitting 

figure 2 Controller Tank, inside view A 

Manual 

Lowering Handle 

figure 3 Controller Tank, inside view 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

LOCAL CODES AND REGULATIONS MAY REQUIRE A 

LICENSED ELECTRICIAN TO CONNECT TO THE MAINS. 

CHECK wITH YOUR LOCAL AUTHORITY BEfORE 

BEGINNING THE INSTALLATION. 

Direct the electrician to the proper installation location for the following: 

1) A fused, lockable, disconnect switch with the proper amperage and voltage supply, as 

detailed on the Pump Unit Data Plate or the supplied job specific Installation Drawings. 

The disconnect must be fused. 

2) A fused, lockable, disconnect switch or breaker for the cab lighting supply. The disconnect 

must be fused. 

3) A pit light, switch and receptacle. (Optional but may be required by local code.) 

NOTE 

Before starting the rail installation, it is important to clean the rail sections first. If they 

are shipped with a protective waxlike coating to prevent rusting, this protective coating 

must be removed. Once the rails are cleaned, check for any burrs or nicks and file as 

required. Apply lithium grease to rails when the installation is completed. 

17 of 145 



3.1 RAIL INSTALLATION wITH SPEEDY JIG 

The Speedy Jig (PN 200743) has been designed to speed up the rail installation process 

and improve the accuracy of the installation. The jig is adjustable to allow use for the Orion 

DBG of 30”. See the photos below showing the two different set ups. 

Tools required Set of mechanical sockets and wrenches (¼” – 1 ¼”), 4 foot Carpenter’s 

level, Carpenter’s square, ⅜” reversible hand drill, ½” Hammer drill, 

⅜” and ½” carbide drill bits, scratch point awl, chalk line, two plumb 

lines, tape measure, four vice-grip pliers, rags and cleaning solvent, 

temporary lighting for hoistway. 

Schedule 2 men for 3 to 5 hours 

The Leaf Brackets are now left and right handed. The round 

pre-drilled opening is to be installed on the rail wall side as 

shown in Figure 13. 

18 of 145 

figure 5 

figure 4 

figure 6 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

Installation Procedure 

To install the rails and rail brackets proceed as follows: 

1) Start by plumbing the hoistway to 

determine the tightest spot in order 

to establish running clearances and 

the overall condition of the rail support 

wall. 

2) Locate the centerline of the rails as 

referenced from the “sill line” on the 

Installation Drawings supplied with 

each elevator (Figure 7). 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

The importance of accurately installing the rails is critical. The rails must be supported and 

aligned properly and they must be true and plumb. The overall performance and “ride” of the 

elevator depend primarily on how well the rails are installed. 

INSTALL THE LADDERS AND/OR SCAffOLDING TO THE 

MANUfACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS. USE ExTREME 

CARE wHEN wORKING AT HEIGHTS AND ALwAYS wEAR A 

SAfETY BELT. 

NOTE 

While 1 mechanic is working on steps 6, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16; the other mechanic can work on 

steps 7, 8, 9, 10, 11. 

figure 7 Installation Drawing 

(Sample) 

19 of 145 



3) Mark the centerline location on the wall and then, 

drop a plumb from this point. Be as accurate as 

possible here and verify that your measurements 

are within +/- 1/32”. “Snap” a chalked plumb line 

to mark the centerline from the top of the hoistway 

to the bottom, refer to Figure 8. 

4) Prepare a 4 foot (1219 mm) carpenter’s level as a 

“template” to mark the location of the rail bracket 

holes. Use a small tip permanent ink marker for 

this purpose. On the carpenter’s level mark the 

centerline and the position of each bracket hole 

to be drilled in the wall. Refer to Figure 9. 

20 of 145 

figure 9 Carpenter Level Template 

5) Starting at the top of the hoistway, use the prepared 

4 foot carpenter’s level to mark the position of the rail 

bracket mounting holes. 

a) Place the marked center point of the level even with 

the marked center of the rail bracket/cylinder bracket 

on the wall. 

b) Ensure that the level is “level” and then, mark the 

location of each rail bracket hole. 

c) Descend to each level and repeat this procedure at 

each rail bracket location. 

d) The exact number of brackets and their locations 

are shown on the Installation Drawings. 

6) Drill holes for each rail bracket. (Wall fasteners may be 

thru bolts, concrete anchors or lag bolts (for wood walls 

minimum ½” bolt). Check your Installation Drawings. 

7) Completely remove the protective coating from the rail 

sections and the splice plates. Once cleaned check the 

rails for burrs and nicks and file down. 

figure 8 Rail Bracket Centerline 

figure 10 Drill Holes 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

8) Scribe a centre line on the back 

of each rail using a T-square and 

scribe as shown in Figure 11. 

This line will be used to align the 

rail with the leaf brackets using 

the diamond cut-out on the leaf 

bracket. 

9) (OPTION) At this point preassemble 

the rail brackets and 

leaf brackets OR complete this 

step after the rail brackets are 

installed (step 11) using the 

hardware provided. Assemble 

figure 11 

the adjustable leaf brackets 

making sure that the brackets are pushed back fully as shown in Figure 12 and 13. 

DO NOT install the rail bracket clips as they will interfere with the use of the rail alignment 

jig. 

10) Refer to the installation drawing 

to install the splice plates to the 

top of each rail section using 4 

of the splice plate bolts, flats, 

locks and nuts provided. Bolts 

need to be snug only as they will 

be tightened up in the hoistway. 

CAUTION: Remember that you 

will be installing one rail “male” 

side up and the other “female” 

side up. See step 19. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

Adjust Leaf Brackets as shown 

figure 12 Rail Bracket Installed 

Rail wall Side 

figure 13 Rail Bracket and Leaf Bracket Assembled 

21 of 145 



11) Install the pre-assembled rail brackets using the wall fasteners making sure that the 

brackets are level. If thru-bolts are used cut off the excess threaded rod protruding from 

the rail brackets as shown in Figure 14. 

12) Proceed to the top rail bracket in the hoistway and install a plumb line on each of the 

adjustable leaf brackets aligning the plumb line with the diamond cut in the middle of 

the bracket. 

13) Install the jig at the top rail bracket as shown in the pictures on below. Using the built in 

vice-grips pull the adjustable leaf brackets into position making sure that the center line 

of the jig corresponds to the center line of the leaf bracket and the plumb line. Use the 

diamond in the middle of the bracket for alignment purposes, refer to Figure 16. Now 

using a tape measure adjust the jig location to ensure that there is 5” from the back wall 

to the plumb line. 

22 of 145 

figure 15 

figure 14 Cut Off excess through bolt 

Plumb Line 

figure 16 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

14) Now using a tape measure, check the plumb line location relative to the wall at all the 

other rail brackets. If the plumb line location shows a dimension at a rail bracket of less 

than 5”, it will be necessary for you to adjust the jig location at the top of the hoistway 

to ensure a minimum plumb line to wall dimension of 5”. Once you have the correct 

position for the top rail bracket tighten the leaf adjustment bolts and remove the jig. 

15) Proceed to the bottom of 

the hoistway and install the 

jig at the bottom rail bracket 

using the built in vice grips 

to pull the adjustable leafs 

into position ensuring the 

centreline of the leaf is in line 

with the plumb line. Tighten 

the adjustable leaf bolts 

then remove the jig. Now 

using a set of padded vice 

grips clamp the bottom of 

the plumb line to the center 

of the bottom adjustable leaf 

bracket. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 17 

16) Proceed up the hoistway using the jig to set all of the adjustable leaf brackets relative to the 

plumb lines. 

17) Set the pit channel in place. Leave the pit channel loose but shim it to ensure it is level. The 

pit channel should be shimmed over its entire length since it supports the full weight of the 

lift and its rated load. The center directly under the jack upstand post must be shimmed with 

steel. Do not bolt the pit channel into place at this time. 

18) Use a pipe wrench to hold the rail clip in place, then install hardware as shown below, do 

not tighten. 

figure 18 Rail Clips on Leaf Bracket figure 19 Rail Clips on Rail 

23 of 145 



19) Stand the first two rail sections in 

the pit channel. CAUTION: Install 

one rail “male side up” and the 

other “female side up”. 

20) Align the centreline on the back 

of the rail with the diamond in the 

adjustable leaf bracket and install 

and tighten the rail clips. Care must 

be taken to ensure that the rail clips 

are properly seated on the rails. 

21) Continue up the hoistway installing 

the rails, rail bracket hardware 

and splice plate hardware. Make 

sure to snug up the splice plate 

bolts before tightening the rail clips 

above it. Check the rail joint with the 

carpenter’s level to ensure the rails 

are properly aligned in the tongue 

and groove joints before tightening 

the splice plate bolts. 

22) All rail joints must be tight, clean 

and smooth, with no overlapping. 

File as required to ensure smooth 

joints. The slightest misalignment 

here will be multiplied and felt in the 

cab. A good rail file job will smooth 

the joint. File at least 4” (102 mm) 

on either side of the joint. Do not 

“point file” at the joint. 

24 of 145 

figure 20 Rail Joints 

figure 21 Assembled Rails 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

The following cab configurations utilize the Leaf Brackets shown below. 

These brackets are not handed. 

► Orion (51” x 51”) 

► Voyager (35” x 84” Coffin Cab with 40” DBG) 

figure 22 Non - handed Leaf Bracket 

25 of 145 



3.2 SPLIT CYLINDER ASSEMBLY (If EQUIPPED) 

1) Remove all protective tape that has been applied to the ends of the cylinder rod halves. 

2) Prepare a lifting device for the raising of the cylinder halves in the hoistway. 

3) Lift the bottom half of the cylinder assembly to a vertical position with the exposed plunger 

facing upwards. Lean this assembly to one side and secure. Remove the lifting device and 

connect it to the top half of the cylinder assembly. 

4) The top half of the outer cylinder barrel and inner plunger must be lifted simultaneously. This 

may require the use of two separate hoisting devices and two nylon straps of cable slings. 

When the top assembly is raised, it should hang perfectly vertical, and the plunger should 

protrude out the bottom of the cylinder barrel about 6” (152 mm). Raise the assembly about 

6” (152 mm) higher than the lower assembly. 

3.2.1 Plunger Assembly 

1) Be sure to clean the threads and inspect the O-ring on the bottom of the plunger now 

hanging in the air. Lubricate the threads with “Lubriplate” (white grease) or similar petroleum 

based grease. 

2) Manoeuvre the lower half assembly into position below the upper half. Slowly lower the 

upper half assembly until the threaded portion of the upper plunger makes contact with 

the corresponding female thread of the lower piston rod. The initial starting of the thread is 

best accomplished by hand (since damage may be caused if cross threading occurs at the 

start). When started, protect the surface of the plunger halves. 

26 of 145 

NOTE 

Tools are needed to screw the two halves together. Strap wrenches are the tools of choice. 

Never use a chain wrench or a pipe wrench. 

3) When the two plunger halves are almost completely screwed together (approximately 

¼ turn from tight), pause for a moment. Rapidly rotate the rods together so that the flat 

surfaces mate with sufficient force to create a torqued joint. No finishing should be required, 

as the joints have been very accurately machined at manufacture but if a lip is noticed it can 

be sanded, refer to Section 3.2.3 Split Cylinder Sanding. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

3.2.2 Cylinder Barrel Assembly 

1) Ensure that the female threads in the lower half cylinder barrel are clean. Inspect the seal 

of the O-ring just below the internal threads. With grease, lubricate the female threads and 

the O-ring, as described above. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

To prevent an external leak from occurring, there must be no nicks or scratches in the 

O-ring. 

2) Clean the male threads on the upper cylinder barrel and lubricate with grease. 

3) Lower the cylinder barrel of the upper assembly and carefully start the thread engagement 

into the bottom half. The same care and technique should be used, similar to joining 

the plunger halves. Once completely threaded together there should not be any visible 

threads. 

4) When the two-section jack assembly has been assembled, refer to section 3.3 Jack Unit 

and Upstand Installation. 

27 of 145 



3.2.3 Split Cylinder Sanding 

Required Tools 

• 80 grit Sandpaper, cut into 1” strips 

• 120 grit Sandpaper, cut into 1” strips 

• 150 or 180 grit Sandpaper, cut into 1” strips 

1) Once the two split cylinder sections are joined together as per Section 3.2 Split Cylinder 

Assembly, the visible crack at the joint can be sanded out as follows: 

28 of 145 

a) Cut the sandpaper into long 1” strips. 

b) Begin with the 80 grit paper, place the sandpaper parallel with the crack as shown in 

Figure 24. Slowly move the sandpaper up and down along the cylinder while sanding 

the crack. 

c) Continue with the 120 grit sandpaper in the same direction. 

d) Finish sanding with the 150 or 180 grit sandpaper in the same direction until the crack 

is no longer visible. 

Once the split cylinder 

sections are joined together, 

a visible crack may exist. 

figure 23 Split Cylinder Crack 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

Sand the crack ONLY 

in the direction 

shown. 

Move the sandpaper 

up and down along 

the cylinder while 

sanding. 

figure 24 Split Cylinder Sanding 

29 of 145 



3.3 JACK UNIT AND UPSTAND INSTALLATION 

The cable hydraulic system features cables, a sheave/guide yoke and a slack/broken cable 

SAFETY DEVICE. 

Care must be taken to ensure that all adjustments of the safety device are properly followed 

and that the lifting cables are handled according to the recommended procedures. 

To install the jack unit and upstand post proceed as follows: 

1) Place the bottom of the upstand post 

into the pit channel and secure the 

top using the jack bracket shown in 

Figure 27, and 28. Do not tighten at 

this time. See Installation Drawings 

for exact bracket locations. 

2) To adjust the upstand post to the 

required height (Figure 28): 

30 of 145 

a) Loosen the lock nut at the top 

b) See Installation Drawings for 

“Adjustable Upstand Setting” 

dimension 

c) Turn the screw until the correct 

height is achieved 

d) Finger tighten the lock nut. 

DO NOT PUT ANY wEIGHT ON THE JACK ASSEMBLY UNTIL 

BOTH THE JACK AND THE UPSTAND ARE SECURELY 

fASTENED TO THE wALL. 

Install the rubber 

gasket between the 

muffler clamp and 

cylinder 

3) Mount the jack unit on top of the 

upstand post ensuring the male end of 

the jack’s base fits the female socket 

figure 25 Jack Bracket 

on the top of the upstand. Secure the top of the jack unit to the rail using the jack bracket 

supplied (Figure 26 and 27). Do not tighten at this time. 

NOTE 

On elevators equipped with a 2” (51 mm) cylinder, the rubber gasket supplied must be 

installed on the jack bracket between the muffler clamp and the cylinder in order to provide 

a tight fit. Refer to Figure 25. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

IMPORTANT 

The Jack Bracket must be installed 

as shown below. Note that the 

square cutout in the bracket must 

be positioned towards the top of the 

hoistway. 

4) Using a plumb line and carpenter’s 

level, ensure the jack and upstand are 

“in line” with each other and vertically 

plumb. Slight misalignment can 

cause undue wear on the seals and 

an unsatisfactory ride in the cab. 

NOTE: The jack centerline is 4 ⅜” 

(111 mm) in the right of the rail/cab centerline. 

5) Tighten all jack and upstand brackets. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 27 Jack Bracket Installed 

figure 26 Jack Bracket Upstand 

The square 

cutout in the 

bracket must 

be positioned 

towards the top of 

the hoistway. 

The above Jack Bracket is supplied with 42 in. 

wide cabs 

31 of 145 



32 of 145 

figure 28 Detail of Adjustable Upstand Post 

Minimum Setting 5 ⅛” 

Maximum Setting 12” 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

3.4 SHEAVE/GUIDE YOKE INSTALLATION 

The sheave/guide yoke must be installed after the Jack Unit and Upstand Post are assembled 

and while the scaffolding is still in the hoistway. This is a heavy piece. Make sure you have 

sufficient help to assist in placing the yoke in position. Use a safety line. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

To facilitate the mounting of the yoke assembly onto the jack, it is easier to pre-assemble the 

guide shoes on the yoke before climbing the scaffold. 

To install the yoke assembly proceed as follows: 

1) Install the two (2) guide shoes, one on each side of the yoke and insert the nuts but do not 

tighten (Figure 29). 

2) Loosen the eight (8) nuts and bolts on either end of the yoke to make it easier to “squeeze” 

the yoke assembly between the rails. 

3) While standing on the scaffold, install the Jack Platen Plate on top of the jack and tighten 

(Figures 30 and 31). Note the difference when a Car Top Prop is used. 

figure 29 Sheave/Guide Yoke 

33 of 145 



4) Position the yoke assembly on top of the Jack Platen Plate making sure the guide shoes 

engage smoothly onto the rails and the two bolt holes on the Jack Platen Plate line up. 

Insert the bolts into the two bolt holes and install the nuts but do not tighten. 

5) “Line up” the yoke with the centerline of the rails before tightening the shoe bolts and 

ensure that the clearance between the shoe and the rail is approximately 1 /16” (2 mm) on 

each side. Adjustment is provided on each end of the channel. 

6) Tighten the Jack Platen Plate bolts to the Yoke. The inside edge of the sheave should now 

be “lined up” with the centreline of the rails and the center of the sheave should be “in line” 

with the centerline of the jack unit. THIS IS IMPORTANT! 

7) Tighten the shoe bolts to the yoke. 

8) Ensuring the guide shoes are approximately 1 /16” from the rail, tighten the eight (8) bolts on 

the yoke assembly. 

9) Loosen the four (4) bolts holding each of the two small channels inside the yoke (located on 

either side of the sheave). These channels are designed to prevent the cables from leaving 

(jumping) the sheave, in the event of the cables slackening. Once the cables are in place, 

these small channels will be re-positioned as close to the sheave as possible, usually within 

⅛” (3 mm), and then tightened. 

34 of 145 

NOTE 

The D.B.G. is 30” and; therefore, the distance inside to inside of the guide shoes should be 

29 ⅞”. It can be a little greater, but it should NEVER BE LESS. 

figure 30 Jack Platen Plate without Car Top Prop figure 31 Jack Platen Plate with Car Top Prop 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

3.5 LIfT CHANNEL UPRIGHTS (STILES) AND SLING 

The safety blocks are shipped in a small cardboard box. The blocks are covered with a 

protective coating that must be removed. The best way to remove the coating is by soaking 

them in a bucket of paint thinner. Once they are cleaned up, they are ready to install. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

There is a left and a right safety block. Ensure they are placed properly so that as the sling 

lowers, the knurled wheel is driven up into the wedge. 

To install the sling assembly proceed as follows: 

1) Bolt the safety blocks securely to the stiles with lock washers. Ensure the proper length 

bolts are used so that they are threaded at least ½” (13 mm) into the safety block. See 

Figure 32 and Figure 33. 

2) Loosely bolt the four (4) guide shoes on the “inside” of the lift channel uprights (stiles) 

and position the lift frame (sling) between the guide rails (Figure 34). 

3) Position the uprights on the rails one side at a time, securing each side to the rails. 

figure 32 Safety Block (R/H)Shown) figure 33 Adjusting Safety Block 

35 of 145 



4) Mount the two (2) torsion bars to the sling (Figure 34). 

5) Mount the car top prop to the uprights. 

6) Install the “X” braces on the uprights using ⅜” x 1” bolts, lock washers and nuts 

(Figure 34). 

Spreader Channel 

36 of 145 

NOTE 

The “X” braces are 1” x ¼” flat bar with slots in each end. ENSURE SLING IS 

“SQUARE” BEFORE TIGHTENING “X” BRACES! X braces are installed only 

when a telephone box is not used. 

Safety Block 

figure 34 Sling Assembly figure 35 Sling Assembled 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

7) The cables are normally shipped coiled and tied with baling wire. One end of the cable has 

a permanent “swaged” fitting attached and the other end is taped to prevent unravelling. 

The swaged end attaches to the sling lifting bracket and the free end attaches to the 

dead end available on the pit channel. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

CAUTION 

When uncoiling the cable, never pull it out by its center. Undo the wire and 

carefully “unroll” the cable. NEVER LET THE CABLE BECOME “KINKED” 

as this can greatly reduce the safety and life of the cable. 

NOTE 

The cable has been installed in the sling lifting bracket with two clamps holding the 

tension of the SAFETY ACTUATING SPRINGS. Do not remove the holding clamps until 

ready to start the pump unit and place tension on the cables. Refer to Figure 36. 

figure 36 Cables on Lifting Bracket 

figure 37 Lifting Bracket 

37 of 145 



8) Position the lifting bracket (with attached cables) so that the ½” (13 mm) hollow rod 

extends through each safety block actuating lever. See Figure 38. Using eight (8) 

carriage bolts, attach the lifting bracket to the uprights. 

9) With the bracket installed, note that the ½” (13 mm) hollow rod extends over to each 

stile and slightly beyond. The safety block actuating levers slide over each end of this 

rod and attaches to the safety block with the special Allen head screws supplied. 

38 of 145 

NOTE 

At this point, all attachments are “loose” and it should not be necessary to “force” anything 

into place. Note that the Allen screw acting as a swivel for the tripping lever is a special 

shoulder bolt. “DO NOT MIX IT UP” with the other two plate attachment screws. When 

installed, the tripping levers should be in the UP position and holding the knurled wheel 

clear of the rails. 

Lifting Bracket 

Hollow Rod 

Safety Block 

Actuating Levers 

figure 38 Lifting Bracket Mounted 

figure 39 Sling Assembly Mounted 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

3.5.1 Stile Retainer Bracket Installation 

The Stile Retainer Brackets secure the sling to the rails in the event of guide shoe failure. They 

are handed (250996, RH and 250997, LH). 

1) Place each bracket on top of the sling, wrap around the rail and secure to the sling with the 

provided ⅜” hardware (102197, 102188, 102191), QTY 4 of each. 

2) The Stile Retainer Brackets can be installed at any point during the installation. 

3.6 CAR TOP PROP INSTALLATION 

General 

The purpose of the Car Top Prop is to provide a refuge space equivalent to Rule 2.4 of A17.1 

for elevators with insufficient overhead clearance. According to Rule 5.2.1.4.4, the Car Top 

Prop may be permitted in an existing building as an alternative to providing sufficient overhead 

clearance. 

Operation 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 40 Stile Retainer Installation 

THE CAR TOP PROP MUST BE fULLY DEPLOYED TO 

THE “ON SERVICE” ExTREME RIGHT, ROTATED AND 

LOCKED POSITION BEfORE ENTERING THE CAR 

TOP AREA. RULE 5.2.1.4.4 

The prop is installed so that when rotated to the “ON SERVICE” position, it is designed to 

interact with a striking plate mounted at the top of the jack. By design, this will immediately 

stop the upward movement of the elevator both mechanically and electrically. An electrical 

protective switch detects movement of the telescoping portion of the prop and opens a 

control circuit to prevent further upward movement. The switch is sensitive to force and will 

39 of 145 



open when a maximum of 20 lbs. force is applied. This permits the lift to be operated in the 

down direction to move away from the prop, if inadvertently actuated. This is in conformance 

with Rule 5.2.1.4.4. 

Storage 

During normal operation of the elevator, the prop is lifted and rotated to the left maximum 

position where it will drop into a “locked” position. In this position, the prop is deactivated and 

does not contact the striking plate at the top of the jack. 

Deployment 

Position the elevator so that the car top is approximately level with the top floor landing. 

To position the car and open the hall door, use the hoistway access switch and the manual 

unlocking device. In compliance with the code requirements, the Car Top Prop can be deployed 

without full bodily entry into the 

car top area. The handle of 

the prop can be reached while 

leaning out from the landing 

sill. Lift the handle about ¼” (6 

mm) and rotate it to the right 

to its maximum travel. The 

prop will automatically drop 

into the locked position when 

released. 

40 of 145 

NOTE 

The prop must be in either the maximum left or maximum right rotated and locked position 

for operation of the elevator. In the maximum left position, the elevator is operated by 

the normal operating controls and with the prop in the maximum right position, the 

elevator is operated by the car top inspection station. 

figure 41 Car Top Prop 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

Before entering the car top area or starting to deploy the prop, set the Car Top Inspection 

Station Switch from the NORMAL to INSPECT position. 

figure 42 Car Top Prop Mounted 

41 of 145 



3.7 BUMPERS AND BUffERS 

To mount the bumper shim, proceed as follows: 

1) Position the bumper shim so that the buffer shims line up with the torsion bars on the 

cantilever arms (Figure 44). 

2) Secure to the pit floor using concrete anchors supplied. 

To mount the rail buffers, proceed as follows: 

1) Calculate the following: 

42 of 145 

NOTE 

A pit buffer is installed in a shallow pit measuring less than 16 inches, rail buffers are 

installed in a deep pit measuring more than 17 inches. 

figure 43 Bumper Shim figure 44 Bumper Shim Mounted 

Height of finished floor (varies between ⅛” – ⅝”) plus 16 ⅞” (429 mm). 

2) Place a level at the door entrance and mark the height on the rail. 

3) From the mark, measure the total distance calculated in step 1, and drill ½” (13 mm) 

hole (Figure 47) on the “milled” rail face. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

figure 45 Rail Buffer (L/H Shown) figure 46 Rail Buffer Mounted 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 47 Rail Buffer Mounted Detail 

43 of 145 



4.0 CONNECTING THE POwER SUPPLY 

44 of 145 

LOCAL CODES AND REGULATIONS MAY REQUIRE 

A LICENSED ELECTRICIAN TO CONNECT TO THE 

MAINS. CHECK wITH YOUR LOCAL AUTHORITY 

BEfORE BEGINNING THE INSTALLATION. 

1) VALVE CONNECTIONS 

Connect valve wiring to the LEFT side of the controller tank. 

2) MOTOR wIRING 

Connect motor wiring to the RIGHT side of the controller tank. 

NOTE 

For step 3, the auxiliary switch will have to be temporarily jumped. 

3) BATTERY POwER SUPPLY (Emergency Lowering/Emergency Lights) 

• To test the operation of the emergency lowering battery supply, open the 110 volt 

power disconnect and the main power supply. The emergency light will illuminate 

and the elevator will run in the DOWN direction only. Connect UPS (uninterruptible 

power supply) to supply plug-in socket. 

4) CONNECTING THE MAIN POwER LINES 

• Make sure the power supply is in accordance with the ordered configuration. 

Connect to screw terminals L1 & L2 (for single phase) or L1, L2, & L3 (for three 

phase), as required. Connect ground to grounding strip “G”. 

5) CONNECTING THE CAB LIGHTING POwER SUPPLY 

• Wire the fused 110 volt, 15 amp supply to the Hot and Neutral screw terminals. 

Connect ground to grounding strip “G”. 

6) CONNECTING AUx (Auxiliary Contact Switch) 

• The National Electrical Code requires that when a secondary power supply or 

battery is used, the main disconnect must be provided with an auxiliary switch that 

will open when the disconnect switch is opened. This is a safety device and must 

be provided by the electrical contractor. Connect auxiliary disconnect switch to 

screw terminals P4 and 1 on the Controller Relay Board (labelled 4th Pole of the 

main line disconnect). 

NOTE 

Refer to the “Electrical Schematics” section (Appendix A) of this manual for power supply 

connections. To ensure proper power supply to the elevator controls, measure the input 

voltage for the lighting power supply (nominally 110 VAC) and the main motor and 

controller power supply (typically 220 VAC or 208 VAC). Ensure that the configuration 

is correct. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

5.0 HYDRAULIC INSTALLATION 

When the EPV-12 is installed, the oil line must have a minimum 

¾” dia. with a ½” dia. NPT adapter at the jack. 

Steel Piping 

Before connecting the oil line, clean it out 

by placing the jack end of the oil line into 

a bucket and running the pump enough to 

flush out a cup or two of oil. DO NOT PUT 

THIS OIL BACK IN THE TANK! 

Make sure the pipe and fittings have the 

proper rating. Most jurisdictions require 

minimum Schedule 40 oil line and fittings. 

When routing the oil line to the hydraulic jack 

assembly, always minimize the number of 

90 o bends in the line. Each 90 o bend causes 

pressure loss and increases the noise level, 

as the elevator operates. 

Insulate the oil line where it passes through 

the hoistway wall to prevent vibration. 

The code permits the use of hydraulic 

hose within the machine (pump) room. It 

is recommended practice to install a short 

figure 48 Steel Piping 

length of hydraulic hose from the gate valve 

on the pump to where the steel oil line starts 

to pass through the hoistway wall. This will 

help reduce the noise level from the pump/motor operation. 

1) The steel oil line must be securely supported to reduce noise and eliminate vibration 

that may loosen or damage fittings and connections. Support the steel pipe on the 

upstand post and clip it to the hoistway wall using insulating clips (Figure 48). 

2) For a 90o elbow, a ½” male NPT to ½” male NPT is suggested. Remember, all fittings must 

be high strength (minimum 

Schedule 40). 

DISTANCE 

RECOMMENDED SIZE Of OIL 

3) For long runs of pipe, 

minimize the number of 90 o 

bends by using 45 o and 30 o 

fittings, wherever possible. 

Use the following chart as a 

guide. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

(Length of Oil Line/Hose) 

LINE/HOSE 

30 feet or less 1/2” Diameter 

31 to 60 feet 5/8” Diameter 

61 to 100 feet 3/4” Diameter 

Over 100 feet 1” Diameter 

45 of 145 



5.0.1 filling the Reservoir 

The amount of oil required will vary depending on the job. The usable fluid is approximately 

20 US gallons or 75.7 litres. When filled to capacity, the tank should hold approximately 15 

to 16.5 US gallons or 57 to 63 litres. 

46 of 145 

NOTE 

The pump and motor must be totally submerged in oil. 

The recommended oil is a 32 weight (grade) “Hydraulic Oil”. Never use old 

oil. 

When filling the reservoir, “top up” the oil until it can be seen in the filter (with the air breather 

cap removed). Remember that the hydraulic cylinder and oil line are empty and must be 

filled first when the motor starts up. This will reduce the amount of “usable” oil for operation 

when the system is filled. It may be necessary to “top up” the oil again once the system is 

filled. The oil should be about 1” to 1 ½” (25 mm - 38 mm) below the rim of the tank. 

ALwAYS ADD THE HYDRAULIC OIL TO THE 

RESERVOIR wHEN THE ELEVATOR IS AT THE 

BOTTOM LANDING. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

5.1 OVERSPEED VALVE INSTALLATION AND TESTING 

REqUIREd PARTS 

Overspeed Valve Kit (PN 207178) 

• Overspeed Valve (PN 105229) 

• Adaptor, ½” x ¾” x 90° (PN 104387) 

• Adaptor, ¾” x 1 1 /16” Flare (PN 105129) 

• Adaptor, Flare JIC ⅞” (PN 105116) 

The Overspeed Governor and Pipe Rupture Valve 

are not required when the Overspeed Valve is 

installed on the Orion. 

1) Install a 90° ½” elbow adaptor to the oil 

inlet on the jack. 

Note the labelling on the Valve body, the “T” 

must be on the tank side of the valve assembly 

and the “Z” must be on the jack side of the 

valve assembly. 

2) Install the Overspeed Valve (PN 105229) to 

the elbow adaptor (PN 104387). Use Teflon 

tape to seal the threads. Refer to Figure 

49. 

3) Run the steel pipe as per the installation manual. 

4) The nut labelled “GPM” is the flow control adjustment. This is set at the factory to job 

specifications and typically will not require adjustment. 

5) Connect the Flare Adaptors (PN 105116 and PN 105129) to the T-fitting inside the oil 

tank, then connect the steel pipe to PN 105129. Refer to Figure 50. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

PN 105116 

Cylinder 

Upstand Post 

figure 50 T-fitting with Adaptors 

Oil Inlet ½” NPT 

Flow Control 

Adjustment 

Z 

Overspeed Valve 

(PN 105229) 

T 

90˚ Elbow (PN 104387) 

Cylinder Side 

Ta nk Side 

Steel Pipe Oil Line 

(Typical ½” Sched. 40 min) 

figure 49 Overspeed Valve 

PN 105129 

47 of 145 



5.1.1 Testing Instructions 

1) Locate the Valve Operator Board in the controller, note the function and value for DOWN 

High Speed may be f6 or f8 depending on the revision of the board. write the existing 

function value down, it will have to be re-entered once the test is complete. 

2) Set the DOWN High Speed (F6 or F8) to 96. Refer to the Valve Programming Instructions 

in the Orion Installation Manual or the EPV Valve Operator Circuit Board Programming 

Update. 

3) To test the Overspeed Valve, run the elevator UP to the second landing. 

4) Place a call to run the elevator DOWN to the bottom landing, while the elevator is 

descending, pull the Manual Lowering Release on the valve. Refer to Figure 3. 

5) As the elevator is travelling in the DOWN direction, it will STOP after approximately 1 

foot of travel at full speed after the Manual Lowering Release is pulled. 

6) Reset the DOWN High Speed (F6 or F8) function to the original value as noted in Step 

1. 

7) If required, an inspection seal can be crimped on the Overspeed Valve adjustment 

handle. 

48 of 145 

NOTE 

The maximum normal travelling speed is 30 feet per minute, the Overspeed Valve will 

activate at approximately 37 - 38 feet per minute. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

L 

A 

B 

A Main Shut OFF Valve Handle 

B Main Shut OFF Valve 

C Low Pressure Switch 

D Check Valve 

E Pressure Gauge 

F Pressure Gauge Shut OFF 

Valve 

G Down Solenoid 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C 

D 

E 

F 

G 

figure 2 Variable Speed Valve 

H 

figure 51 Variable Speed Valve 

I 

Dome Cap/Top 

H Manual Lowering Release 

I Proportional Valve 

J Relief Valve 

K Slack Rope Valve 

J 

L Rupture Test T-fitting 

Lock Nut 

Adjusting Screw (inside) 

49 of 145 



5.2 TEMPORARY RUN BUTTON INSTALLATION 

The temporary run buttons (PN 200438) consist of an UP 

button (FAST and SLOW speed), a DOWN button (FAST 

and SLOW speed) and a red safety button. 

While pressing the red button, press the UP FAST or SLOW 

speed button to travel in the up direction or the DOWN FAST 

or SLOW speed button to travel in the down direction. 

Release the red button to stop the elevator. 

Temporary Button Operating Procedure 

50 of 145 

figure 52 Temporary Buttons 

1) Ensure the red wire inside the battery backup is plugged into the battery terminal. 

2) Place a temporary wire jumper between screw terminals 1X and 24V on the bottom of 

the main board to bypass the final limit and plank switches. 

3) Ensure that the auxiliary disconnect switch (fourth pole of disconnect) is connected to 

screw terminals 1 and P4 (or place a temporary wire jumper across them). 

4) Place a temporary clip-on jumper wire across the small wire loops labelled TP1 and 

TP2, located to the left of the temporary run cord jack on the top right of the main 

board. 

5) Plug the temporary buttons into the top right corner of the main relay board. 

ALL wIRE JUMPERS ADDED IN THE ABOVE 

PROCEDURE ARE TEMPORARY AND MUST BE 

REMOVED PRIOR TO THE LIfT BEING PLACED 

INTO SERVICE. 

NOTE 

Use of the temporary buttons must be restricted to trained personnel, since the lift will 

operate regardless of the status of all safety circuits and door locks. 

NOTE 

Refer to section called, “Electrical Installation” for pump connection. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

The hydraulic system is now ready for start-up. Before starting up, however, first confirm the 

following: 

1) Power supply is properly connected to the correct voltage and phase. Use your meter 

to verify. Check that proper fuses have been supplied. On three phase systems, confirm 

that the pump is turning in the proper direction. Jog the pump, and if no pressure 

appears in the gauge after a few seconds, reverse any two (2) motor leads on the 

incoming L1, L2 or L3 power lines. 

2) All rails are installed and plumb. All fasteners and anchors are installed and tightened. 

3) The upstand post is connected plumb and straight to the special rail bracket. 

4) The jack unit is installed and it is plumb and straight. The cylinder wall mounting bracket 

is installed and secure. 

5) The guide yoke is lowered onto the jack unit, and all attachment plates and bolts are 

fastened correctly and securely. 

6) Sufficient oil is in the reservoir. The tank must be topped up full. 

7) A ladder or scaffold is in the hoistway, and access is available to the air bleeder valve 

at the top of the cylinder. 

8) The gate valve is open. 

5.3 BLEEDING AIR fROM THE CYLINDER 

1) Open the air bleeder screw a half of a turn. Using the temporary buttons, press the UP 

button on the temporary run button momentarily and release. The motor will start and 

then stop. Start and stop the motor quickly. Oil should start to flow through the main 

valve to the jack cylinder. 

2) As the oil flows into the cylinder, air will be heard to “hiss” out of the air bleeder valve. 

An assistant should be near the air bleeder to verify this. 

3) Do not run the motor continuously to try and speed up the bleeding process or the 

jack may jump up unexpectedly. This is due to the oil entering faster than the air can 

escape. 

4) When the air is exhausted from the cylinder, oil will begin to flow out of the bleeder 

valve. At this point, close the air bleeder valve. Check for oil leaks. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

A flow control valve must be specially ordered, if required. 

51 of 145 



5.4 ROPING POSITION 

To adjust the roping position, proceed as follows: 

1) Refer to Installation Drawings for “Roping Position” and run the cylinder to the height 

specified. 

2) The roping position will ensure 3” (76 mm) of “runby” at the top floor and the buffers 

will ensure a maximum of 3” (76 mm) of “runby” at the bottom floor. This may vary by 

jurisdiction. 

3) With the piston extended to the roping position and the sling sitting on the bumpers, 

rope the sling. 

52 of 145 

figure 53 Roping Position 

NOTE 

The elevator will not reach the top and bottom landings correctly, unless the roping 

position is set correctly. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

5.5 CABLE INSTALLATION 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

MAKE SURE THERE IS GOOD COMMUNICATION BETwEEN 

YOU AND YOUR CO-wORKER. DO NOT PLACE YOURSELf 

IN AN UNSAfE POSITION DURING THIS PROCEDURE. If 

SUPPLIED, ATTACH THE SAfETY STOPS. 

1) Attach the threaded rod of the wedge clamp to the rope tie down bracket located in the 

pit channel (Figures 54 to 56). 

2) Identify the cables as they descend the other side of the sheave and attach them to the 

wedge clamps. ENSURE THAT THE CABLES DO NOT CROSS OVER. 

NOTE 

Before putting any weight on the cables, make sure that the nuts on the wedge clamp 

threaded rods are “backed off” to the end of the threads on the rod. To ensure plenty of 

adjustment to equalize the cable tension when weight is applied, leave two full nuts at 

the end on the thread. When adjusted, there must be two (2) nuts locked together on 

the underside of each rod. There may also be one nut on top that is used to prevent the 

wedge clamp from rotating. 

3) Manually thread the cables into the wedge in a loop, then place the loose wedge piece 

in the loop. Pull on the loose end to take up the slack in the cable. Confirm that each 

loaded cable is directly over the threaded rod. DO NOT REVERSE. 

4) Pull up on both cables until they are equal in tension. The wedge piece will hold the 

cables in place. Tape the loose ends of each cable temporarily to prevent them from 

becoming wedged in the sling. They will be cut later. 

If CABLE ADJUSTMENT wITHIN THE wEDGE ASSEMBLY 

IS REQUIRED, MAKE SURE THE PLATfORM IS BOTTOMED 

OUT OR ON SAfETIES BEfORE RELEASING THE CABLE 

wEDGE AND CLAMPS. 

5) Perform a final inspection to ensure that all cables are in correct alignment and that all 

hardware such as bolts, clamps, wedges and pins are in place. 

There may be instances where the platform will not be able to reach the top landing, but 

the jack can still handle the travel. 

53 of 145 



When this happens, it usually means that the rope wedge terminations have not been 

correctly adjusted. If the rope wedge terminations are not properly adjusted and if the pit is 

deep enough, the elevator may descend 6” (152 mm) below the bottom floor level, but not 

be able to reach the top landing. 

To correct this problem, shorten the cables by tightening the nuts on the ½” (13 mm) threaded 

rods. Each cable should be shortened evenly to ensure that the elevator will reach the top 

landing and the terminal “runbys” with equal tension. 

54 of 145 

figure 55 Wedge Clamp 

figure 54 Wedge Clamp Procedure 

figure 56 Positioning of Wedge Clamps 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

5.6 PIT PROP 

General 

The purpose of the Pit Prop is to provide 36” of pit in conformance with ASME/ANSI A17.1, 

Rule 5.2.1.4.2, thereby, providing an area in the pit for maintenance and inspection. 

Operation 

The prop is installed so that without complete 

bodily entry into the pit, the prop can be rotated, 

lifted and “set” in the UP position. In the UP 

“set or locked” position, the prop is designed 

to physically stop and hold the loaded car at 

the governor tripping speed. By design, it will 

immediately stop the downward movement of 

the elevator and support the loaded weight 

of the elevator car without causing stresses 

and deflections in the car frame and platform 

members. 

Storage 

During normal operation of the elevator, the 

prop is lifted, rotated and lowered to its storage 

position flat on the floor of the pit. 

Deployment 

Position the elevator so that the platform is 

a minimum of five (5) feet (1524 mm) above 

the pit floor level. Use the hoistway access 

switch, if supplied, or the manual unlocking 

device and open the lower landing door. In 

compliance with the code requirements, the 

Pit Prop can be deployed without full bodily 

entry into the pit area. The handle of the prop 

can be reached while leaning into the pit area. 

Grab the handle and lift the prop UP to the 

vertical position, lift and “set”. The prop will 

automatically drop into the locked position 

when released. 

Installation 

The pit prop is permanently mounted to the pit 

floor. Locate the pit prop against/centered on 

the pit channel. Refer to Figure 57. Note, the 

handle on the pit prop is field reversible. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 57 Pit Prop 

figure 58 Pit Prop in “Set” (Deployed) Position 

55 of 145 



5.7 PLATfORM INSTALLATION 

Install the cab platform 5 ¾” (146 mm) from the centerline of each guide rail and bolt the car 

door sill(s) to the platform. See Figure 59. 

Run the elevator the full travel of the hoistway, while checking for proper clearances between 

the elevator and the hoistway equipment. Particularly, note the sill clearance at each landing, 

and adjust the platform if necessary. 

For power sliding doors, the platform sill should be aligned evenly with the landing with a 

clearance of 6 ¾” (191 mm) at the tightest point, so that when the landing door is positioned, 

the sill to sill clearance is 1 ¼” (32 mm). 

For swing doors, the sill to sill clearance is typically ⅝” (16 mm). Refer to job specific 

Installation Drawings for your clearances. 

Once proper platform position is determined, level the platform in both directions and tighten 

bolts to the sling. Check the running clearance again. 

56 of 145 

6 ¾” 

figure 59 Platform Installation 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

figure 60 Platform Installation 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

57 of 145 



5.8 SETTING THE SAfETIES 

1) Position yourself on 

the platform and make 

sure the two (2) lower 

guide shoes are loose 

on the bolts. It should 

be possible to manually 

push the platform toward 

the hoistway wall and 

sufficiently open the gap 

at the back of the safety 

block to place a 1 /16” (2 

mm) shim on each safety 

block. The shims should 

remain in position when 

the pressure is released 

from the platform (stop 

pushing). Refer to Figure 

61. 

2) Instruct your co-worker to 

pull the manual lowering 

valve while you press 

down on the tripping 

pan. 

58 of 145 

DO NOT ENTER THE PIT AREA UNTIL THE PIT PROP 

IS SECURELY SET AND LOCKED IN POSITION. 


Tripping Pan 

Tripping Bar 

Slack Cable/ 

Plank Switch 

Cables 

figure 61 Safety Block and Shim 

Safety Block 

Guide Shoe 

3) While pressing on it, the tripping pan will move down once the platform starts to descend; 

the safety block’s knurled wheels will be forced into position. This will wedge the safeties 

securely against the rails and prevent any further descent of the platform. 

4) This also “sets” the distance of clearance at the back of the safety blocks, as the 1 /16” 

shims are still in place. Once the safeties have “set” (supported the load), instruct your 

co-worker to release the manual lowering valve. 

5) With the safeties set and the shims in place, tighten the bolts on the two (2) lower guide 

shoes. This will “set” the clearance. 

6) Start the pump and move the elevator in the UP direction a few inches. This will apply 

tension to the cables and the safety device will automatically reset itself to its proper 

running position. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

7) Remember to check the Plank Switch. This switch must be checked every time the 

safeties trip or the elevator will not operate. 

8) Remove the two (2) shims (behind the safety blocks) before attempting to run the 

platform. This may be difficult, as they may be “tight” in places and some loosening 

may be necessary to remove them. Usually, the shims will come out when the elevator 

is moved in the UP direction and is then lowered. 

9) Ensure proper tensioning to the cables on re-application of weight. 

5.9 OVERSPEED GOVERNOR 

1) Attach the auxiliary governor bracket to the governor mounting bracket using nuts, bolts 

and lock washers supplied. See Figure 62 and 63. 

2) While standing on top of the platform, install the overspeed governor assembly at the 

top of the rails. Fasten the bracket to the rails using four (4) rail clips on each side. 

3) Lower the elevator to the bottom level. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 62 Overspeed Governor Assembly 

4) Raise the cab approximately six (6) feet (1829 mm) above the pit floor level so that work 

can be performed. 

5) Disconnect the power supply to the elevator including the power supply to the battery 

back-up system. 

MAKE SURE THE MAIN POwER IS DISCONNECTED 

TO THE ELEVATOR AND THE BATTERY BACK-UP 

SYSTEM. 

59 of 145 



6) Locate the cable tensioner assembly and remove the pulley. Refer to Figure 63. 

7) Attach the tensioning bar (complete with weight), to the pulley bracket (located in pit 

channel) using the ⅜” (9 mm) shoulder bolt supplied. Re-attach the pulley (refer to the 

bottom half of Figure 63 below). 

8) Block the counterweight up; thereby, lifting the pulley up to its’ highest position. 

60 of 145 

Nut (1/2-13) 

Lock washer 

Screw 

(1/2-13 x 2 1/2) 

Weight 

Bushing 

Pulley 

Bushing 

Tensioning bar 

figure 63 Cable Tensioner Assembly 

Nut (3/8-16) 

Screw (1/2 x 1/2) 

Flat washer 

Nylon washer 

Screw (1/2 x 1 5/8) 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

9) Feed the governor cable through the small hole in the bottom of the governor tripping 

cage. Refer to Figure 64. Continue feeding the entire cable until you reach the swaged 

button on the end. 

10) Continue to feed the cable through the bottom pulley, then up through the top pulley and 

back down to the governor tripping cage. 

11) Take up the excess slack and create a small loop at the end of the cable, insert the 

thimble then, clamp it together. Refer to Figure 65. 

12) Insert the cable loop into the top of the governor tripping cage and secure using clevis 

pin and cotter pin supplied. 

13) Remove the block from underneath the counterweight to further tighten the cable. 

14) Reconnect the power supply, including the power supply to the battery back-up 

system. 

Governor 

Tripping 

Cage 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 64 Lifting Bracket 

Safety 

Tripping Rod 

Governor Cable 

figure 65 Cables on Lifting Bracket 

15) Hold the UP - SLOW SPEED (on temporary buttons) to gradually take up the slack in 

the cable. 

16) Wire the overspeed governor switch (refer to Figure 62) in series with the pit switch 

through conduit to the controller, refer to the Electrical Schematics in Appendix A. 

61 of 145 



5.10 PIT SwITCH INSTALLATION 

1) Install the “switch-box” portion of the Pit Stop Switch Assembly in the pit area close 

to the slam side of the door frame. The “switch box” portion should be installed about 

4 feet (1219 mm) above the lower landing level, where it can be easily reached while 

standing in the door opening. 

2) Run wiring or conduit from the Pit Switch to the Pump Controller. Refer to the Electrical 

Schematics in Appendix A and connect pit switch across screw terminals 2 and 3. 

62 of 145 

figure 66 Pit Stop Switch Box 

NEVER USE SOLID wIRE SUCH AS THERMOSTAT 

wIRE TO wIRE THE LIfT. USE THE STRANDED 

MULTI-wIRE PROVIDED. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

5.11 TAPE READER 

1) Bolt the tape brackets to the rail so that the tape sits 

“behind” the yoke. 

2) Attach the tape reader to the left hand sling stile. 

(Figure 68). 

3) Slide the tape through the tape reader. 

4) Attach the tape to the rails (top and bottom) and 

stretch until taut. 

5) Level the cab with the floor and mark the center of 

the tape reader on the tape behind it with a marker. 

This marked point will be the center of the 8-inch 

magnets. This procedure will position the magnets 

roughly in the correct position. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 68 Tape Reader 

figure 67 Tape Reader Bracket 

63 of 145 



64 of 145 

NOTE 

Do not remove the sticky tape from the back of the magnets until the first 

maintenance visit. 

6) Position the magnets as shown in Figure 69 on the next page making careful note of the 

placement of + (north, all black) and - (south, yellow stripe) polarities and the 3 vertical 

column positions. Refer also to the Electrical Schematics in Appendix A. 

7) Adjust the valve operator board so the lift stops in the center of the magnet. Jump up 

and down in the cab and confirm that neither LU (level up) or LD (lever down) come on. 

If they do, the board needs to be adjusted again. 

8) Once the cab is confirmed to be stopping in the center of the magnets, check the car 

sill and landing sill alignment and slide the magnets up or down accordingly so the cab 

stops even with the landing. 

9) If the tape reader does not sense the magnets, do the following: 

a) The north and south magents are centered on the tape as shown in Figure 69. 

b) To adjust the sensors, remove the tape reader and bring it into the cab. Remove 

the tape reader cover and bend the black sensors (Hall Effect sensors) closer to the 

magnets. 

c) Clip additional magnets to the back side of the tape reader, north behind north and 

south behind south. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

Slowdown Up Level, Down Level & Door Zone Targets 

1FP (-) 

Landing 

Reset 

Targets 

6th Landing 

5th Landing 

4th Landing 

3rd Landing 

2nd Landing 

1st Landing 

Landing 

Reset Target 

Floor Position Magnet Installation 

(PLC Controller) 

©Savaria Concord Lifts Inc. 

Yellow 

South 

Black 

North 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

4FP (-) Landing 

Reset Targets 

(+) 

Down High 

Speed 

Slowdown 

Distance 

(+) 

Up High 

Speed 

Slowdown 

Distance 

(+) 

Door Zone 

Slowdown 

& Levelling 

Target 

2FP (-) 

Landing 

Reset 

Targets 

Car Floor Position 

figure 69 Magnet Positions On Tape 

Tape 

Reader 

LED’s 

Bottom Landing DZ ON 

Second Landing 

Third Landing 

Fourth Landing 

Fifth Landing 

Sixth Landing 

LED 

LED 

Description 

DZ Door Zone 

1FP 

2FP 

4FP 

Floor Position 

Indicator 

LU Level Up 

LD Level Down 

DZ ON 

1FP ON 

DZ ON 

2FP ON 

DZ ON 

1FP ON 

2FP ON 

DZ ON 

4FP ON 

DZ ON 

1FP ON 

4FP ON 

rev. 07-06-1 

65 of 145 



5.12 LIMIT SwITCH/fLOOR ZONE 

All elevators are equipped with a Normal Limit Up (NLU), a Normal Limit Down (NLD) and 

a Final Limit switch which bolt to the right side of the sling. These switches should only 

contact the cam if the elevator runs past the floor by 1” (25 mm). The floor zone switch is 

only supplied on elevators with electric solenoid door locks and swing doors, it clips to the 

rail. This switch is activated by the floor zone cam mounted on the sling and it should make 

contact 2” (51 mm) above or below the floor. 

66 of 145 

NOTE 

All limit switches and cam adjustments must be installed before the cab is assembled. 

figure 70 Floor Zone and Hoistway Access figure 71 NLU/NLD Limit Switch Assembly 

figure 72 NLU Cam Assembly 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

Refer to the table below to determine which switches are supplied based on the elevator 

configuration ordered. 

Switch Type Sliding 2-Speed Doors Swing Pro-Doors 

Floor Zone Switch 

Energizes lock solenoid to open doors 

at selected landing 

Hoistway Access Switch 

Keyswitch in hall call and COP enables 

doors to remain open and travel away 

from the top landing for maintenance 

Overtravel Limit Switch 

Prevents overtravel of the cab at top 

and bottom landing 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

Overtravel Limit 

Switch Cam 

Overtravel Limit 

Switches 

No Yes 

Yes, optional based on travel between the top 

landing and the 2nd from the top landing, and code 

Yes Yes 

figure 73 Limit Switches and Floor Zone Arrangement 

Floor Zone and/or Hoistway 

Access Switch 

Floor Zone and/or 

Hoistway Access Cam 

67 of 145 



6.0 CAB ASSEMBLY 

To assemble the cab, proceed as follows: 

1) Bolt the handrail to the control wall. 

2) Insert washers over the studs on the wall base plates and secure the wall to the base 

plates using the ¼” - 20 hardware supplied. Note, the number of washers required is 

determined by sill / finished floor height. Refer to Figure 74. 

68 of 145 

IMPORTANT 

WHEN INSTALLING A LIGHT CURTAIN, SECURE THE STATIC SIDE OF 

THE LIGHT CURTAIN TO THE STRIKE jAMB PRIOR TO INSTALLING THE 

STRIKE jAMB. 

3) Position the cab walls (with base plates) flush to the platform starting with the control 

wall first, then the front wall, the opposite wall and finally the rear wall. Secure the walls 

to the platform using #10 - ¾” wood screws supplied. Refer to Figure 76 or 77. 

NOTE 

The side wall (opposite control wall) for steel cab models is placed 1 ½” (38 mm) from 

the edge of the platform (Figure 74). 

4) Install all the ¼” - 20 hardware loose until the cab is plumb and square. 

5) Carefully position the cab ceiling and loosely install all the hardware. 

NOTE 

In order to allow the cab to be “plumbed and squared”, leave all the nuts and bolts 

loose. 

Orion Installation Guide. 

PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 74 Base Plate Detail 

69 of 145 



6) Install the two (2) cab stabilizer brackets (from the top of the cab to the sling) using ⅜” 

hardware. Do not tighten. Refer to Figure 75. If required, trim each bracket on the cab 

ceiling side. 

7) Ensure the cab entrance frame is plumb and square to 

the landing entrance. Once the entire cab is plumb and 

square, tighten the hardware starting with the ⅜” ceiling 

mounting angles, the ¼” hardware in all four corners, 

then the rest of the hardware top, bottom and sides. 

8) 

70 of 145 

a) For steel cabs, thread the six (6) screws into the preinstalled 

pem nuts located on the control panel wall. 

b) for units equipped with plastic laminate panels, thread the six (6) inserts into 

the pre-drilled plastic laminate control panel holes with an Allen key. Note, do not 

hammer the inserts into place. Thread the six (6) screws into the inserts. 

9) Install the control panel backing plate. 

10) Install the control panel box. 

11) Mount the telephone box (if supplied). 

Cut the brackets here 

figure 75 Cab Stabilizer Brackets 

12) Install the wire duct from the ceiling to the control panel. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 76 Steel Cab 

figure 77 Plam Cab 

71 of 145 



72 of 145 

figure 78 Cab Assembly 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

6.1 CAR OPERATING PANEL (COP) INSTALLATION 

Plastic Laminate Cab (Plam) 

1) Thread six 7 /32” machine screws with washers into the provided pre-drilled holes located 

around the COP cutout of the cab control wall. 

2) Unpack the COP and loosen the Allen head set screws to gain access to the COP. 

3) Locate the six slots on the hinge base mounting plate of the COP. Align these slots with 

the machine screws threaded into the control wall in step 1. 

4) Loosely mount the COP on the control wall. 

5) Locate the Car Junction Board assembly and mount to the existing six 7 /32” screws in 

the bottom half of the COP cutout (oriented with the Dupline module towards the top). 

6) Attach the wire duct from the car top to the cutout in the left hand side of the Car 

Junction Box. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

The black enclosure box must be installed at the top of the COP cutout after the elevator 

installation is complete to allow access to the tape reader and normal limit switches. 

Mount to the existing 7 /32” screws in the top half of the COP cutout. 

73 of 145 



6.2 LIGHT CURTAIN INSTALLATION 

The safety light curtain provides obstruction sensitivity. It signals the operator to stop and 

re-open the doors. Refer to Figure 79 below. 

Required Parts 

• Light Screen Support Bracket (PN 251785) 

• Light Screen Strike Post Panel (PN 251581) 

• Light Screen, 2000 mm (PN 105274) 

The safety light curtain provides obstruction sensitivity. It signals the door operator to stop 

and re-open the doors. See Figure 79 below. The light curtain assembly consists of the 

following: 

• transmitter 

• receiver 

• 24V power supply 

• mounting brackets and hardware 

When installing the light curtain: 

1) Ensure the door jamb and the door edge are square to one another, both in the closed 

and open positions. 

2) It is imperative that the light 

screen transmitter and receiver 

are aligned vertically (have the 

same line of sight and are pointed 

directly at one another). 

3) Verify the vertical alignment of 

the transmitter and receiver, and 

then drill holes in the fast car 

door for the channel mounting 

bracket. 

4) Install the channel mounting 

bracket to the fast car door with 

the provided self-tapping screws 

(TEKs), then install the transmitter 

to the bracket. 

74 of 145 

figure 79 Light Curtain Install 

5) Route the cables from the 

transmitter along the top of the 

fast car door and secure with cable ties and sticky bases. Ensure sufficient length of 

cable remains to allow the doors to fully close without stretching the cable. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

If any landing door or car gate is left open then the cab lights will remain on, and the life 

span of the light bulbs will be reduced. 

Remove terminal 

blocks to install 

power supply 

6) Remove the terminal plugs from the 24V power supply as shown in Figure 80 and 

secure to the top of the car near the 2 speed door operator. 

7) Connect the transmitter and receiver cables to the 24V power supply. Note that each 

cable can be plugged into either terminal. Refer to Figure 80. 

8) Replace the terminal blocks on the 24V power supply and connect to the Dupline board 

as follows, refer to Figure 

81. 

✔ Green terminal 1 to D- 

✔ Green terminal 3 to 

DC+ 

✔ Black terminal 4 to I2 ✔ Black terminal 6 to D- 

9) Verify the operation of the 

light curtain by checking the 

LED located on the receiver 

(static door frame side): 

✔ Red LED must be ON 

when the light curtain 

is obstructed 

figure 80 24V Power Supply 

figure 81 Dupline Board 

Black T-4 to I 2 

Green T-3 to 

dC+ 

Connect 

transmitter 

and 

receiver 

cables here 

Black T-6 to d- 

Green T-1 to d- 

75 of 145 



6.3 AUTOMATIC CAB LIGHTING 

This feature automatically turns the car ceiling lights ON and OFF through the control circuitry. 

It is not necessary to add a light switch or key switch to control the lighting. The features and 

sequence of operation are as follows: 

1) Calling the elevator from landing controls 

Upon pressing the call button, the car lights will automatically come ON when the elevator 

starts to move. The car will arrive at the landing with the car lights ON. 

2) Entering the elevator 

If the elevator is at the same landing as the caller, then open the landing door or car gate to 

enter the elevator. The elevator interior lights will turn ON automatically. 

3) Power failure 

If there is a power failure in the main power supply to the motor control (not the lighting 

supply), then the lights will also turn ON as a safety feature. 

6.4 CAB GATE INSTALLATION (If EQUIPPED) 

To install the gate assembly, proceed as follows: 

1) Remove the lower gate track from the platform (Figure 82). 

2) Shim underneath the lower gate track so that the top of the track is flush with the 

finished floor. Secure the gate track to the platform. 

3) Thread the rollers located at the top of the gate assembly onto the upper gate track. 

76 of 145 

NOTE 

If gate assembly is equipped with a power door operator, the operator must be installed 

prior to the gate assembly. For auto-gates, proceed to section Auto-Gate Operator. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

4) Mount the upper gate track, along with the gate assembly, to the header using ⅜” 

machine screws. Ensure the guide pin at the bottom of the gate assembly is properly 

inserted into the lower track. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

Before threading the rollers onto the upper gate track, place the track against the header 

and orientate the track in the correct direction by aligning the holes. 

5) Install the GAL gate switch on top of the door header (Figure 83). 

NOTE 

For auto-gates, the machine screws pass through the header and screw into the bottom 

of the gate operator. 

6) Attach the gate switch arm to the leading edge of the gate assembly. 

7) Connect the wiring harness to the operator. The wiring harness is pre-wired to the 

controller. For the operator and card schematics, refer to the gate operator schematics 

shipped separately with the elevator. 

NOTE 

For units equipped with auto-gate operator, tighten all the screws that secure the operator 

to the ceiling. 

77 of 145 



Toeguard 

78 of 145 

Auto Gate Operator 

Mounting Bracket 

Header 

Upper 

Gate 

Track 

Gate 

Switch 

Arm 

Sill 

Lower Gate Track 

figure 82 Car Entrance w/Auto Gate 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

Header 

Gate Leading Edge 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

Cab Gate 

Lock 

Screws 

figure 83 GAL Gate Switch 

Switch Arm 

79 of 145 



6.4.1 Gate Lock Channel 

Each Gate Lock Channel configuration is based on travel, contact 

Tech Support for replacements. Install as follows: 

1) Locate the centre of each landing and install the Door Zone 

Block Plate(s) (PN 251640) on the gate latching side with 

the provided hardware (PN 101186 #14 - 1 ¼”). 

2) Secure the Cab Gate Lock to the header and slam post. 

3) If required, assemble the Lock Hook Parts (PN’s 251638, 

251639) with the provided wing nuts (PN 104499). 

4) Secure the Gate Lock Channel sections to the 

hoistway on the gate latching side with the 

provided hardware (PN 101186 #14 - 1 ¼”). 

The Gate Lock Channel must be alinged with 

the entire length of the hoisway and mated 

Gate Lock 

Channel 

sections 

with the Door Zone Block Plate(s). Refer to Figure 84. 

251639 

80 of 145 

door 

Zone 

Block 

Plate 

251640 

6. 

00 

6. 

00 

251638 

Gate 

Slam 

Post 

Cab Gate Lock 

Gate Switch 

Bracket 

figure 84 Gate Lock Channel 

DETAIL 

A 

Gate Operator 

Header 

A 

Gate Panel 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

6 

6

6.5 PORTA - GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION 

1) Unpack the unit, remove the cover, and check for any physical damage before 

proceeding. 

2) Check to see that you have the correct hand unit. The operator is designed so the motor 

is on the stack side of the gate. Although the operator can have its handing reversed, this 

requires a large amount of overhang and will result in the operator warranty being voided. 

3) Install the gate assembly as follows using gate hardware pre-pack PN 202054: 

a) Loosely install the sill to the platform. 

b) Install the toeguard backing (wood) and the toeguard onto the sill. 

c) Adjust the sill assembly upwards until the toeguard is flush with the finished floor, 

then tighten. 

d) Install the entrance angle. 

e) Install the pocket angle. 

f) Install the header. 

g) Hang the gate assembly from the top track. 

h) Mount the gate to the top track using the supplied #8-32 x ¾” flat head screws. 

i) Insert the guide pins located in the bottom of the gate assembly into the bottom 

track. 

j) Drill 5 holes spaced equally through the trailing edge of the gate assembly and the 

pocket angle and secure using #6 x ¾” screws. 

k) Position the gate jamb post against the entrance angle then mark and drill the 

entrance angle. 

l) Install the gate jamb post onto the entrance angle using #6 x ½” flat head tap 

screws. 

4) Operate the gate manually. The door must operate smoothly without any binding. 

Correct any problems with the gate before proceeding. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

A separate clear anodized gate operator arm assembly is supplied when Clear Fold 

gates are ordered (P/N 200788). 

81 of 145 



5) Install the operator onto the gate header using three ¼”-20 nuts, lock washers and flat 

washers Align the bottom lip of the Operator Chassis with the edge of the header and 

tighten the fasteners. 

6) Attach the gate operator arm to the gate lead post with the ¼”-20 x 1 ¼” carriage bolts 

and acorn nuts provided. Refer to Figure 85. 

7) Pull the gate closed until the gate arm magnet contacts the magnet flag. Note that both 

magnets needs to be in full contact with the flag. 

8) Check for any binding or interference during operation by manually rotating the lead 

screw (it is easier to rotate if you remove the drive O-ring but remember to replace). Reposition 

the operator or shim the gate arm as necessary to ensure smooth operation. 

9) Manually rotate the lead screw to open the gate about ½” from its fully closed position. 

Adjust the closed limit so that it “clicks” when the gate is about ¼” from being fully 

closed; check by manually rotating 

the lead screw. 

10) Adjust the close slow down limit 

so that it is about 2” center-tocenter 

from the closed limit. 

11) Manually rotate the lead screw 

to about ½” from its fully open 

position. Adjust the open limit so 

that it “clicks” when the gate is 

about ¼” from being fully open; 

check by manually rotating the 

lead screw. 

12) Adjust the open slow down limit 

switch so that it is about 2” center 

to center from the open limit 

switch. 

13) Ensure all pivot points rotate 

freely at the top and bottom of the 

gate. If the pivot points are stiff, 

lubricate them with a 3-in-1 oil, 

then fold and unfold the gate. 

82 of 145 

figure 85 Gate Installation 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

ntroller to interface board. Reinstall SP1 if using only an open signal 

6.6 PORTA - GATE OPERATOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 

ation and replace cover. 

1) The Porta-Gate Operator is field wired including the gate switch. Run electrical 

field wires from operator through conduit or greenfield. 2 ½” knockouts are 

provided in the chassis for an appropriate fitting. 

2) Ground the chassis per local 

electrical code. 

3) Verify power before 

connecting the operator. 

4) Verify the type and voltage 

of control signal being used, 

refer to Appendix A Electrical 

Schematics. 

5) There are 5 jumpers on the 

board: 

a) SP1: Auto close, with 

this jumper installed 

the operator will 

automatically close 

when there is no signal 

to open. This must be installed. 

Patent Pending 

b) SP2-SP5: Are used to select the control signalization. Refer to Appendix A 

Electrical Schematics. 

6) To test unit, set speed pots in the middle of their range. Then use on board toggle switch 

to open and close the operator. Adjust the speed control and limit switches as necessary. 

7) Connect the gate operator harness to the COP board at T11 and/or T14. Reinstall 

SP1 if using only an open signal from the controller. Refer to Figures 88 and 89. 

8) Test the unit for automatic operation and replace cover. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

figure 86 

Page6 

Porta Inc. Phone: (847) 381-3004 

28W039 Commercial Ave. Fax:(847) 381-5997 

Lake Barrington, IL 60010 website: portainc.com 

If the gate is stalled during the open cycle. it will shut down. To reset, turn the power OFF by 

turning the car STOP button OFF and ON again. 

83 of 145 



84 of 145 

figure 87 Porta-Gate Operator Board Layout 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 88 Porta-Gate Operator Wiring Connection 

85 of 145 



86 of 145 

figure 89 COP Board Layout 

Connect the Gate Operator harness to 

the T11 and/or T14 as required. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

6.7 PORTA - GATE TROUBLESHOOTING 

Pr o b l e m Po s s i b l e ca u s e co r r e c t i v e ac t i o n 

No Function No power Verify 24V between “B+” and “B-” 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

Fuse Check Fuse “F1” 

Controller Signal Check operation with test switch 

Faulty Limit Verify that limits are open 

when not actuated 

No High Speed Faulty Slow down Verify that slow downs are open when not actuated 

No low speed Slow down not 

engaged 

Motor turns but 

no gate movement 

Reverse operation Board wiring or 

controller wiring 

Excessive 

breakaway force 

Board is powered but motor 

does not engage 

Verify that the cam engages the slow down limit switch. 

Faulty Slow down Verify that slow downs have continuity when actuated 

Loose Pulleys Verify that the drive and driven pulley’s are tight on the 

shafts 

0-Ring Check for loose or missing O-ring 

Gate Check gate for excessive bind 

Step 1 

Step 2 

Check operation with test switch 

DOWN is open. 

Swap M+ and M- if necessary 

Put small washers on the magnets opposite the flag. If 

force is still excessive, go to step 2 

Remove a magnet. If force is still excessive, put small 

washers on the remaining magnet opposite the flag. 

Unit has stalled out Step 1: Shut off power supply to unit. 

Step 2: Identify and remove the cause of the stall. 

Step 3: Power unit back up. 

NOTE 

If the resistance to gate closure exceeds the magnetic coupler, the gate dis-engages from 

the operator and becomes a MANUAL GATE. Advise the user that they must do one of the 

following: 

• Close the door manually to run the elevator 

• Cycle the door to re-engage the magnetic coupler 

87 of 145 



6.8 DUPLINE BOARD PROGRAMMING fOR DOOR AND GATE 

OPERATORS 

Required Tools 

✔ Dupline Programming Tool (PN 104318) 

The Dupline boards for door operators or gates are programmed to “front”. Elevators with 

rear door operators or gates require the Dupline board to be re-programmed for “rear”. 

Refer to the appropriate Car Wiring Electrical Schematic in Appendix A and Table 1 for 

Dupline values. 

1) To program the Dupline board(s), refer to the Dupline OEM instructions provided with 

the programming tool. 

2) Locate the operator/gate Dupline board in the door operator/gate header. 

3) Connect the Programming Tool to the Dupline board, the Tool will disable normal 

operation to the operator/gate. 

4) Read/Program the correct Dupline values. 

Note that the labelling on the Dupline boards may vary from the provided electrical schematics 

as follows : 

D+ is equivalent to DUP 

D- is equivalent to GND 

88 of 145 

2 Speed Doors (Wittur) and 

Sliding Doors (ECI) 

Table 1 Dupline Values 

Swing Door Gate 

Operator 

Front door Operator Rear door Operator Front Gate Operator 

I1 = not used I1 = not used I1 & I2 = not used 

I2 = B4 I2 = E4 O1 = A1 

I3 = B6 I3 = B8 O2 = A2 

I4 = B5 I4 = B7 Rear Gate Operator 

O1 = not used O1 = not used I1 & I2 = not used 

O2 = A3 O2 = A7 O5 = A5 

O3 = A2 O3 = A6 O6 = A6 

O4 = A1 O4 = A5 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

6.9 CTIS INSTALLATION 

Select the appropriate procedure: 

6.9.1 2-Speed Door Operator Configuration 

1) Secure the CTIS to the CTIS mounting bracket (PN 251590) using #10-32 machine 

screws. 

2) Remove the plug (9-pin or 10-pin 

TSSA) from the CTIS harness. 

3) Thread the CTIS harness 

through the provided ⅜” flex 

conduit (½” flex conduit is also 

suitable). 

4) Install the CTIS and mounting 

bracket to the 2-Speed Door 

Operator mounting bracket 

using 7 /16” bolts and washers 

(QTY 4 ea.) as shown in Figures 

90 and 91. 

5) Locate the appropriate cab 

ceiling wiring knock-out and 

route the CTIS harness through 

the knock-out towards the Car 

Station Junction board. 

6) Run the wiring from the CTIS to the Car Station Junction board, removing wiring covers 

where necessary. 

7) Secure the flex conduit to the 

wiring knock-out. 

8) Connect the 9-pin or 10-pin 

plug to the CTIS harness and 

terminate wiring at the Car 

Station Junction board as per the 

Car Wiring Diagram in Appendix 

A, Electrical Schematics. 

9) Install the light bulb (not 

provided) and light bulb 

protective cover on the CTIS. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

CTIS buttons must be accessible from the hoistway entrance. 

figure 90 CTIS mounted, rear view 

figure 91 CTIS mounted, top view 

89 of 145 



6.9.2 Cab Gate and Swing Pro-Door Configuration 

Option A 

1) Insert two (2) spring loaded clips (with spring against the cab ceiling) to the cab ceiling 

struts at the cab 

entrance as shown 

in Figure 92. 

2) Secure the mounting 

bracket (PN 251726) 

to the spring clips 

with ¼” bolts and 

lock washers (QTY 

2 ea.) as circled in 

Figure 93. 

90 of 145 

figure 92 Spring Clip 

3) Remove the plug (9-pin or 10-pin TSSA) from 

the CTIS box harness. Thread the CTIS harness 

through the provided ⅜” flex conduit (½” flex 

conduit is also suitable). 

4) Secure the CTIS box to the mounting bracket 

with two (2) #10-32 screws as circled in Figure 

94. 

5) Locate the appropriate cab ceiling wiring 

knock-out and route the CTIS harness through 

the knock-out to the Car Station Junction 

board. 

6) Run the wiring from the CTIS box to the 

Car Station Junction board, removing wiring 

covers where necessary. 

7) Secure the flex conduit to the wiring knockout. 

8) Connect the 9-pin or 10-pin plug to the CTIS 

box harness and terminate wiring at the 

Car Station Junction board as per the Car 

Wiring Diagram in Appendix A, Electrical 

Schematics. 

9) Install the light bulb (not provided) and light 

bulb protective cover on the CTIS box. 

Bracket 

opening 

must face 

entrance 

figure 93 Mounting Bracket 

figure 94 CTIS Assembly Mounted rear 

view 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

Option B (If Hoistway Dimensions Permit) 

1) Secure two (2) spring loaded clips to the mounting bracket (PN 251726) with ¼” bolts 

and lock washers (QTY 2 ea.) as shown in Figure 95. 

2) Remove the plug (9-pin or 10pin 

TSSA) from the CTIS box 

harness. Thread the CTIS 

harness through the provided 

⅜” flex conduit (½” flex 

conduit is also suitable). 

3) Secure the CTIS box to the 

mounting bracket with two (2) 

#10-32 screws as circled in 

Figure 95. 

4) Insert the assembly into the cab ceiling struts from the side of the cab by sliding the 

springs into the strut. Take care to avoid dropping the springs in the hoistway. 

5) Locate the appropriate cab ceiling wiring knock-out and route the CTIS harness through 

the duct to the Car Station Junction board. 

6) Run the wiring from the CTIS box to the Car Station Junction board, removing wiring 

knock-out covers where necessary. 

7) Secure the flex conduit to 

the wiring knock-out. 

8) Connect the 9-pin or 10pin 

plug to the CTIS box 

harness and terminate 

wiring at the Car Station 

Junction board as per 

the Car Wiring Diagram 

in Appendix A, Electrical 

Schematics. 

9) Install the light bulb (not 

provided) and light bulb 

protective cover on the 

CTIS box. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

Install spring clips as shown 

figure 95 CTIS Assembly 

figure 96 CTIS Assembly Mounted 

91 of 145 



7.0 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 

Refer to Appendix A for Electrical Schematics (schematics are shipped in a separate package). 

92 of 145 

figure 97 Orion Wiring Layout 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

7.1 HOISTwAY JUNCTION BOx INSTALLATION 

1) Prior to starting the wiring review the schematics and field wiring diagrams to ensure you 

are comfortable with the various harnesses that need to be installed and where they will 

terminate (hoistway box or controller). Determine where the box will be installed. 

2) Install the Hoistway Junction Box in the hoistway. It is typically mounted on the rail wall 

outside the rails, but if there is room, the box may be mounted on any wall without a 

door. The box should be situated vertically, approximately two (2) feet (610 mm) above the 

halfway point of the elevator travel. 

3) Mount the Junction Box using the four (4) #12 x 1” wood screws provided in the Junction 

Box/Raceway prepack or with Dealer supplied hardware if preferred. 

7.2 HOISTwAY JUNCTION 

BOx CONNECTIONS 

Terminate all the travelling cables 

to their appropriate terminals as 

shown in Appendix A Electrical 

Schematics. 

1) Terminate all the travelling 

cables to their appropriate 

terminals. 

2) Connect wiring from T52 and 

T53 to the controller box, 

observing necessary gauge 

of wiring from chart below. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

HOISTwAY wIRING MUST BE DONE IN 

ACCORDANCE wITH LOCAL CODES AND 

REGULATIONS. CHECK wITH YOUR LOCAL 

T52 

Black, White and Green 14 AWG 

All the rest 

T53 

ENfORCING AUTHORITY. 

18 AWG preferred, 20 AWG 

acceptable 

Black and White 14 AWG 

All the rest 

18 AWG preferred, 20 AWG 

acceptable 

figure 98 Hoistway Junction Board 

93 of 145 



7.3 TRAVELLING CABLES 

1) The travelling cables exit the back of the controller 

box at the bottom. Route them to the underside of 

the platform. 

2) Attach the travelling cables to the underside of the 

platform using the under cab cable bracket 

(Figures 98 and 99). Secure the under cab cable 

bracket to the bottom of the platform using #10- 

½” wood screws. Leave a large loop of cable 

at the point where the travelling cables exit the 

under cab cable bracket. The loop should be large 

enough to accommodate the full up and down 

travel of the elevator. Ensure there is sufficient 

slack in the cable when the elevator is at the 

top and bottom landing before final fastening or 

routing of travelling cable. 

3) When two (2) travelling cables are used, insert both 

cables under the wedge. 

4) To route the travelling cables to the halfway junction 

box, pass them behind the safety device tripping 

figure 99 Bracket Mounted 

rod and the lifting bracket up to the hoistway junction box. 

5) To support the load of the cables, install the tension relief bracket one (1) foot (305 mm) 

below the bottom of the halfway junction box (Figure 99). The tension relief bracket 

supports the weight of the travelling cables, so that this weight does not act on the 

hoistway junction box terminals. 

6) Ensure that when the elevator is run to the top floor, there is at least 12” (305 mm) of 

cable hanging below the tension relief bracket and a gentle bend connecting to the cab. 

With the elevator at the bottom landing, ensure that the cable is not too tight and is not 

rubbing on the side of the platform or piling up on the pit floor. If the cable is not installed 

properly, shortened cable life will result. 

7) If there is extra travelling cable, do not let it pile up on the pit floor. Fold it neatly and 

fasten the excess travelling cable to a brace under the platform, or fold it between the 

hoistway junction box and the tension relief bracket. 

94 of 145 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

7.4 CONTROLLER LAYOUT AND wIRING 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

1 2 

6 

7 

9 

10 

1 DC Power Supply 

2 PLC 

3 PLC Expansion Module, TSSA (Ontario only) 

4 Master Dupline Module 

5 Valve Operator Board 

6 Transformer, Cab Lighting Supply 

7 By-pass Relays for CTIS, TSSA (Ontario only) 

8 Main Relay Board 

3 4 5 

8 

13 

figure 100 Controller Layout 

11 12 

14 

15 

9 Transformer, Controller Supply 

10 Back-Up Battery 

11 Contactor, Pump Motor PM 1 

12 Contactor, Pump Motor PM 2 

13 Ground Terminal Strip 

14 Power In Terminal Block 

15 Pump Motor Overload 

Test Jumper 

(TJ 1, TJ2) 

and Temp Run 

Button Input 

Hall Station 

Wiring Input 

Car Wiring 

Input 

95 of 145 



7.4.1 Selecting the Controller Location and Environment 

Mount the controller in a location that provides: 

• adequate support for the weight of the controller (66 lb). The controller is shipped with 

brackets to allow it to be mounted to the hydraulic unit but it can be remote and mounted 

to properly reinforced walls. 

• adequate lighting for installation and maintenance activities. 

• convenient access for the routing of the required conduits and cables, 

• convenient access to other devices in the machine room. 

For improved controller reliability: 

• Keep the machine room clean. 

• Do not install the controller in a dusty area. 

• Do not install the controller in a carpeted area or area where static electricity is a 

problem. 

• Keep room temperature between 50°F to 120°F (10°C to 49°C) and 95% noncondensing 

relative humidity. Extended high temperatures will shorten the life of 

electronic components. Provide adequate ventilation or air-conditioning as required if 

necessary. 

• Avoid condensation on the equipment. Keep the controller away from sources of 

condensation and water (such as open windows) as these can create a hazardous 

condition and can damage the equipment. 

• Do not install the controller in a hazardous location or where excessive amounts of 

vapors or chemical fumes may be present 

• Make sure power line fluctuations are within ±5%. 

• High levels of radio frequency emissions may cause interference with the controller 

micro-processor, and produce unexpected and even dangerous results. This could be 

caused by hand-held communications devices used near the controller. 

96 of 145 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

7.4.2 Controller Grounding 

Grounding of the controller must conform to all applicable codes. Proper grounding is essential 

to the safe operation of the equipment and contributes to improved lifetimes/reliability of the 

electronic components. 

Specifically ensure that: 

• The grounding wire is sized per the applicable codes. 

• The ground is properly connected to a good building ground, such as the structural 

steel of the building, or a cold water pipe. 

7.4.3 Machine Room Connections 

Refer to Appendix A for more detail. 

1) Connect the hydraulic valve to the Main Controller board using cable supplied. 

Connections are as shown in Figure 101. 

2) Connect the pump and motor to the appropriate connections in the main controller box. 

Refer to Figure 102 for single phase units and 3 phase units. 

3) Connect the Main Power to the terminal blocks in the Controller box as shown in Figure 

103. 

4) Connect the back up battery as shown in Figure 104. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

CAUTION 

PROPER GROUNDING IS VITAL fOR THE SAfE OPERATION Of YOUR SYSTEM. 

BRING THE GROUND wIRE TO THE GROUNDING STRIP LOCATED IN THE UPPER 

RIGHT HAND CORNER Of THE CONTROLLER BOx (SEE LABELED PICTURE 

BELOw). YOU MUST CHOOSE THE PROPER CONDUCTOR SIZE. SEE NATIONAL 

ELECTRICAL CODE ARTICLE 250-95, OR THE RELATED LOCAL APPLICABLE 

CODE. 

97 of 145 



98 of 145 

Plug and Play 

Plug and Play 

Plug and Play 

figure 101 

figure 102 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 103 

figure 104 

99 of 145 



7.5 LANDING CONNECTIONS 

Installation and wiring of hall call stations for 2 Speed Doors (Sliding) 

Refer to Appendix A Electrical Schematics for more detail. 

1) Run wiring from the Fire Service Station (if equipped) to the main hall call station. 

Connect the wiring at each hall call station as shown in the hall call wiring schematics 

shipped separately with the job (in a box with a large roll of 9-conductor wire). 

2) Run wiring from the hoistway access station (if equipped) to the hall call station and 

connect wiring at each hall call station . 

3) Install wiring from the landing door lock contacts to T109 of the hall call station at each 

landing. 

4) Wire T100 and T101 from each hall call station to the next appropriate hall call station 

and then to the controller’s ‘hatch wiring” terminals. 

5) Terminate wiring from hall call stations at the controller. 

6) Ensure the required jumpers are installed at the top landing hall call station. 

Installation and wiring of hall call stations for Pro - Doors (Swing) 

1) Run wiring from the door operator in the header and connect to T105 of the hall call 

station. 

2) Run wiring from the floor zone switch (wired normally open) to T104. 

3) Run wire from the door close microswitch to T102 of the hall call station. 

4) Run wiring between hall call stations and the controller, connect T100 and T101 of each 

hall call station. 

5) Connect hall call station wiring to the controller. 

6) Ensure the required jumpers are installed at the top landing hall call station. 

100 of 145 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

7.6 TERMINATION Of wIRING AT CONTROLLER 

After wiring all of the hall stations and locks into the halfway box you are ready to terminate 

the cables at the controller. This step of the installation requires the greatest attention to detail 

as you will be connecting numerous pre-stripped wires to terminal blocks in the controller . 

Attention to detail is very important to ensure a problem free installation and start up. 

Starting with travelling cable A connect the correct color and number wire to the numbered 

terminals on the main control board. 

NOTE: If the site is an area prone to lightning strikes, ground the sling to TA 15. Connect the 

rails to ground is the machine room. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 105 Wiring Connections 

101 of 145 



7.7 CAR STATION CONNECTIONS 

Refer to Appendix A Electrical Schematics and the Car Station Junction Board layout below to 

connect the harnesses to their appropriate terminals as follows: 

✔ T1, T2, T3, T4, T7, T8 to Hoistway Junction Box Travelling Cables 

✔ T10 to Car Operating Panel (COP) Pushbuttons and Position Indicator Harness 

✔ T11, T12, T13 and T26 to Front Gate Operator Harness 

✔ T14, T15, T16 and T27 to Rear Gate Operator Harness 

✔ T17 to Plank Switch Harness (Slack Cable Switch) 

✔ T18 to Car Top Prop Harness 

✔ T19, T20, T21, T22 to Car Top Inspection Station Harness 

✔ T23 to NLU/NLD/FL Harness 

✔ T24 to Cab Pot Lights Harness 

✔ T25 to Magnetic Tape Selector Harness 

102 of 145 

figure 106 Car Station Junction Board 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

7.8 POwER UP AND TEST THE ELEVATOR 

Once all of the cabling has been completed you are ready to power up and test the lift. 

Refer to Appendix C, section 3.6 to perform a few simple tests to ensure controller is 

wired correctly before power is applied. failure to do so may cause damage to the 

controller. 

Calling the lift to the floor: 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

IMPORTANT 

The steps described in Appendix C must be completed before attempting to run the 

elevator. 

1) If safety circuit is completed, all doors and gates are closed with CTIS in RUN position, 

the lift is enabled and the lift is not in use (hall call light OFF); pressing a call button at 

any landing will register a call for the cab and the button light will come ON. At this point 

other calls will be prevented (one call only). The lift will go to the floor from which the 

call was placed, door(s) will unlock and power gate/door will open (if equipped). The 

door will stay open for a pre-selected time before closing. If the door is held open then 

gate will remain open and locks will not time-out. 

2) Inside the cab a call can be placed to any floor. Once the call is entered doors and gates 

will start closing. 

3) When the gate(s) close the door will lock and the lift will start moving to selected floor. 

At this point the call can be cancelled with the car stop switch but not the car key 

switch. When the lift approaches the selected landing fast speed will be turned OFF 

approximately 8” from the floor and lift will continue on low speed until the levelling 

signal (LU or LD) is OFF. Then lift will then stop, locks will open and the power gate/ 

door will open (if equipped). 

4) After door/gate closes and locks it can be reopened by pressing the DOB button or call 

button corresponding to current landing. 

NOTE 

This is not an exhaustive test and all limit switches, zone switches etc. should be tested 

and their operation confirmed prior to handing over to the owner. 

103 of 145 



8.0 INSTALLATION Of fIRE RATED PRO-DOORS 

The PRO-DOOR LANDING ENTRANCES are fire rated and have been tested and approved 

for minimum fire separation of two (2) hours. The landing entrances are an integral unit, prewired, 

zinc wipe coated and ready for installation at the site. Each integral landing entrance 

has a manual or automatic swing type door with a clear opening of 35” wide x 80” high (890 

mm x 2030 mm). 

104 of 145 

NOTE 

It is recommended to leave the doors in the frames and make sure the beaks/latch bolts 

enter the locks freely. This will ensure trouble-free door operation after the frames are 

bricked in or framed in. There is close running clearance between the door frames and 

the edge of the platform, therefore, the door frames must be set carefully and exactly. 

Align the door and door frames to the platform as shown in Figure 109. 

NOTE: Never allow a contractor to install your PRO-DOORS. 

1 ¼” c a b w a l l t h i c k n e s s 

d ay l i g h t e d g e 

o f d o o r 

fire rated 

door 

½” to ⅝” 

c a b P l at f o r m 

figure 109 Positioning of Pro-Door and Frame 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

1) Begin at the bottom floor and move the door and frame into the rough opening. 

2) Ensure the cab is square and level before lining up the doors. 

3) Line up the door so the car sill to door sill is the required clearance (refer to installation 

drawings). For the left to right adjustment, line up the door frame to the cab opening. 

Ensure the door is square and level. 

4) Fasten the door sill to the floor using large flat head screws (wooden floors); or the 

¼” x 1 ¼” drive pins supplied (concrete floors). It is a good idea to discuss entrance 

placement (sill) with the contractor since, in some cases, the sill may have to be raised 

to permit the finished building floor to match the door sill. 

5) Secure the top of the frame with the frame support brackets, ⅜” x ¾” long bolts, 

washers, nuts and ¼” x 1 ¼” drive pins supplied. 

6) After the frame is secured, carefully open the door and check the clearance between 

the beak/latch bolts and the door lock. The door must latch easily. 

7) Set the rest of the floor doors and frames in the same manner as above. 

8) The frames can now be either bricked-in or framed-in and dry-walled. It is recommended 

that the installer be on-site when the contractor finishes around the door frames. 

9) When the door frames are complete, install the fascias between the door frames. Note 

that on through-cabs the fascias must be put on above and below rear door frames, 

or to meet local code requirements. Install the fascias using pop rivets at the top and 

bottom of the door frames. Use ¼” drive pins to secure the fascias at the edge. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

Fascias must be custom measured at the site and are a different size for each job. 

Therefore, they are not supplied by the factory and must be obtained locally. 

105 of 145 



8.1 PRO- AUTO DOOR OPERATOR iii INSTALLATION 

8.1.1 Operator Adjustment 

The Pro-Auto Door Operator III is factory shipped pre-installed in fire rated Pro-Auto Doors. 

The handing of the Pro-Auto Door and the Pro-Auto Door Operator III must be the same, 

LH (PN 300698) or RH (PN 300697). Note that Pro-Door handing is determined by which 

side the door lock in on. 

RH pulley rotation 

(clockwise) 

Electrical connections, cam adjustments and tension settings must be completed to enable 

operation. 

1) Remove the operator cover from the Pro-Door header. Set the hardware aside. 

2) Remove the ¼” x 1 ¼” flat-head Phillips screw securing the arm assembly to the 

operator spring shaft. Slide the arm from the spring shaft. 

3) Set the tension on the spring as follows: 

a) for right-hand operators, rotate the pulley in a clockwise direction to feel a 

noticeable resistance. Release the pulley, and when it stops rotating, turn the 

pulley clockwise 3 more times and insert a small flat-head screwdriver between 

the belt and the pulley. Refer to Figure 111. 

b) for left-hand operators, rotate the pulley in a counter-clockwise direction 

to feel a noticeable resistance. Release the pulley, and when it stops rotating, 

turn the pulley counter-clockwise three more times and insert a small flat-head 

screwdriver between the belt and the pulley. Refer to Figure 111. 

106 of 145 

door Lock 

door Lock 

RH LH 

figure 110 Pro-Door Handing 

LH pulley rotation 

(counter-clockwise) 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

c) The operator may have to be removed for this step. If drive belt tension adjustment 

is required, loosen the three ½” Phillips machine screws from the motor mounting 

bracket and slide left or right to tighten/loosen the belt around the pulley. Refer to 

Figure 111. 

Remove 3 screws from 

motor mounting bracket 

d) With the door at a 45°, place the arm over the spring shaft and secure with the ¼” 

x 1 ¼” flat-head Phillips screw. Remove the screwdriver and test door function 

e) If more adjustment is required, open the door to a 45° angle and stop the drive belt 

by inserting the screwdriver between the belt and pulley. Remove the ¼” screw 

and separate the arm from the spring shaft. 

f) To further increase spring force: from the 45° angle, close the door approximately 

12”, rotate the arm by one spring shaft groove, and loosely re-attach the arm to the 

spring shaft with the ¼” screw. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

OR 

g) To further decrease spring force: from the 45° angle, open the door approximately 

12”, rotate the arm by one spring shaft groove, and loosely re-attach the arm to the 

spring shaft with the ¼” screw. 

4) Connect the electrical wiring as per Section 8.1.2 Electrical Installation. 

5) Adjust cams and pots as per Sections 8.1.3 Potentiometer Adjustments and 2.4 Setting 

the Cams. 

6) Once no further adjustment is required, remove the ¼” screw, apply blue Loctite thread 

locker (or equivalent), and firmly re-install the screw through the arm and spring shaft. 

7) Re-install the door header cover. 

8) Test operation. 

Rotate pulley to 

set spring tension 

Remove arm from spring shaft 

figure 111 Setting Spring Tension (RH Shown) 

107 of 145 



8.1.2 Electrical Installation 

IMPORTANT 

The battery back-up wires are shipped disconnected. Connect the red and black wires 

to T4-1 (negative) and T4-2 (positive) terminals and check the F1 fuse for continuity. 

1) Connect the operator harness from terminal T2 on the Operator Control Board to the 

elevator Hoistway Junction Board (i.e. TDOB, TDOM, TDOT). Refer to the Electrical 

Schematics supplied with the lift/elevator. Also refer to Figure 112 on a later page. 

2) Connect the lock harness located in the door header to the hall station harness. Refer 

to the Electrical Schematics supplied with the lift/elevator. 

Jumper Configuration 

Start-Up 

Initial Force Jumper, RH two pins for max. or LH two pins for min. Set to the maximum position 

J1 only if the extra initial opening force is required to get the door started; otherwise set to the 

minimum position. 

J3 Install jumper (should stay installed) 

During initial installation set the following: 

1) Initial force Jumper J1 must be set to MIN. 

2) Pot R13 Open Speed must be set to MIN. Remaining pots must be set to top centre 

as shown in figure 112. 

3) Slowly turn R13 Open Speed clockwise until the door opens. Leave R13 at this setting. 

4) When R13 Open Speed is set to MAX, the board will shut down. Turn R13 Open Speed 

counter-clockwise to MIN and repeat step 3. 

108 of 145 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

8.1.3 Potentiometer (POT) Adjustments 

The cams “stop” and “start” the opening and closing of the door. However, if fine tuning is 

required, there are five potentiometers located on the circuit board which can be adjusted. In 

each case, turning the pot clockwise increases the value, and counter-clockwise decreases 

the value. Refer to Figure 112. 

POT fUNCTION INITIAL SETTING 

R16 o P e n t i m e Cw sets the Open Time to maximum, approximately 1 minute 

R13 o P e n s P e e d CCw sets Open Speed to minimum 

R18 h o l d c u r r e n t/b a c kc h e c k CCw sets Hold Current to minimum 

R39 c l o s e s P e e d CCw sets Close Speed to minimum 

R45 o P e n i n g f o r c e /o v e r c u r r e n t Cw sets the Overcurrent trip point to maximum 

TERMINAL fUNCTION 

T1 Motor power leads connector, T1-1 (+), T1-2 (-) 

T2 Lift/Elevator Main Control Board harness connector 

T3 Switch and Cam Assembly harness connector 

T4 Battery Back-Up leads connector, T4-1 (+), T4-2 (-) 

T5 Remote Control Receiver harness connector (not used) 

TSS Electric Strike leads connector (provided by others) 

TDOB Wall mounted Push Button Switch leads connector (not used) 

TAC Wall Transformer (power in) leads connector (not used) 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

109 of 145 



Refer to figure 112 for pot layout. 

a) Set all the pots as previously indicated. 

b) Press the Door Open button. The Open LED will come ON. 

c) Adjust the Open Speed pot R13 to obtain the desired opening speed. 

d) Once the door reaches the open position, adjust the Hold Current pot R18 to hold 

the door open against the return spring. 

e) When the open time expires and the door begins to close, adjust the Close Speed 

pot R39 to obtain the desired closing speed. 

f) Repeat the above procedures as many times as required to fine tune the settings 

and adjust the Open Time pot R16. 

g) Adjust the Opening Force pot R45 so that the door closes if it encounters an obstruction 

while opening. The amount of force the door will apply to overcome any obstruction or 

blockage is determined by the Opening Force pot setting. 

J1 

110 of 145 

R16 

Open 

Time 

TAC 

R13 

Open 

Speed 

J3 

R18 

Hold 

Current 

TdOB 

R45 

Open 

Force 

TSS 

R39 

Close 

Speed 

T1 

T2 T5 T3 

T4 

figure 112 Control Board (PN 772393) 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

8.1.4 Setting the Cams 

There are two cam and switch assemblies which require field adjustment. Adjust each cam 

in the exact sequence as indicated below: 

1) Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to hold each cam and manually rotate around the 

spring shaft into position. 

2) Brake Switch (Top Switch, Fig. 113-A) 

Wire colours are Red and Green; the switch is wired normally open. As the door is 

closing, adjust the upper cam (Brake Switch cam Figure 113-A) so that the cam stops 

making contact with the microswitch when the door is 3/4” (19 mm) from the fully closed 

position. 

3) Open Limit Switch (Bottom Switch, Fig. 113-B) 

Wire colours are Brown and Blue; the switch is wired normally open. Adjust the lower 

cam (Open Limit cam Figure 113-B) so that the cam stops making contact with the 

microswitch when the door is in the fully open position. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

Manualy rotate each cam into position with 

needle-nosed pliers 

figure 113 Cam amd Switch Assembly 

A 

B 

Spring Shaft 

111 of 145 



9.0 PRO-LOCK INSTALLATION 

The PRO-LOCK is a true interlock (or elevator style lock). An electric contact will interrupt 

the power to the control mechanism if the door is in the OPEN position or if the door is not 

securely closed and locked. The interlock will prevent movement of the elevator when the 

door is OPEN. The PRO-LOCK is also the rated Fire Latch for use with the PRO-DOOR. 

9.1 PRO-LOCK OPERATION 

� With the door in the closed position, the Pro-Lock is de-energized and the door is locked 

in the closed position. 

� The latch-bolt is positioned forward into the doorkeeper. 

� When the latch bolt center pin strikes the post in the center of the keeper, it allows the 

silver-plated electrical contacts within the Pro-Lock to close. 

� This action informs the controller that the door is “closed and locked”, and the lift will 

respond to a call. 

� When the elevator arrives at a floor, the Pro-Lock is electrically energized to unlock the 

door. 

� The lock remains unlocked when the door is open. When the door is closed, the lock 

remains energized until a pre-set time passes. The solenoid then de-energizes to lock 

the door and complete the circuit to the controller. 

9.2 PRO-LOCK ADJUSTMENT 

The PRO-LOCK is factory installed in each PRO-DOOR and tested prior to shipping. 

112 of 145 

Site adjustment may be required to the lock and keeper. 

The lock body is mounted in the entrance assembly frame and is accessible from the 

hoistway side. The keeper is mounted on the face edge of the door. 

1) To ensure proper and consistent operation of the Pro-Lock, open and close the door 

and observe the lock function. 

2) First, remove the lock cover from the hoistway side by removing the four (4) attachment 

screws. The mechanical action of the lock can be exposed for viewing the manual 

opening and closing of the lock mechanism. 

3) From the hoistway side, manually press down on the top of the solenoid where it attaches 

to the latch bolt lever yoke. This will retract the latch bolt into the lock body and unlock 

the door. 

4) Slowly release the pressure on the latch bolt and let it return into the door keeper. If 

correctly aligned, the movement of the latch bolt will be smooth and easy as it enters 

the keeper. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

5) If the latch bolt operation appears to be stiff and does not cleanly enter the keeper, 

then some adjustment of the keeper and/or lock assembly is needed. There is some 

movement of the lock body on the slotted mounting holes provided. These can be seen 

when the cover is removed. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

Disconnect the power supply before removing the nuts to avoid shorting the 

electrical contacts to ground. 

6) Access to the nuts holding the lock is best achieved with a “nut-driver”. There is limited 

space within the lock; therefore, care must be used when inserting the nut driver. 

7) Loosen the nuts. The lock body may now be moved slightly up and down, as well as in 

and out, toward the keeper. Tighten the attachment nuts when completed. Make sure 

that wiring does not get caught under the nuts. 

8) If the alignment is still not correct, there are four (4) screws on the face of the keeper. 

The two (2) outside screws are for fastening the keeper mounting plate to the door 

edge. The two (2) inner screws are for adjusting the position of the keeper itself in 

relation to the latch bolt in the lock. 

9) Loosen the two inner screws, just enough to allow the keeper to move. Do not remove 

the inner screws. Note that the keeper may be adjusted 360º within the back plate 

holder. If the screws are left “snug”, the keeper will stay in any position it is placed. 

10) Close the door to allow the latch bolt to release and move forward into the keeper. If 

it does not enter cleanly, then gently push the latch bolt into the keeper. The keeper 

will adjust its position to align with the latch bolt. With the latch bolt in the keeper, try to 

open the door. This pressure will assist the keeper to align itself. 

11) Manually open and close the latch bolt and note that the operation is smooth (since the 

keeper is now aligned). Manually open the latch bolt and tighten the keeper attachment 

screws. 

9.3 ELECTRICAL CONTACTS ADJUSTMENT 

Observe the two (2) electrical contacts on the carrier mounted on top of the latch bolt. When 

the latch bolt is fully forward into the keeper, there should be at least 1 /16” (2 mm) of spring 

compression on each side of the contact. 

This indicates sufficient contact pressure to permit consistent electrical operation. If the 

spring compression is less than 1 /16” (2 mm), it may be necessary to shim the keeper forward 

toward the lock assembly. 

113 of 145 



114 of 145 

NOTE 

The PRO-LOCK has been certified by CSA International as a true interlock. 

The PRO-LOCK has also been tested and certified to the A.S.M.E. A17.1 and the CSA 

B44 Standards for elevator interlocks. 

figure 114 Pro-Lock RH 

Mounting nuts 

insert slot 

Latch bolt mates with keeper 

Voltage reducing switch 

Mounting nuts insert slot 

Solenoid 

Lock contacts 

Compression springs 

figure 115 Pro-Lock Keeper 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

10.0 ADJUSTING AND SETTING THE EPV VALVE 

When the EPV-12 is installed, the oil line must have a minimum ¾” dia. 

with a ½” dia. NPT adapter at the jack. 

MODELS 

The EPV variable speed (control) valve is provided in three models: 

• EPV-4 is intended for oil flows up to four (4) gallons per minute, the minimum down 

working pressure is 180 psi. 

• EPV-7 is intended for oil flows in excess of four (4) gallons per minute, up to a maximum 

of seven (7) gallons per minute, the minimum down working pressure is 300 psi. 

• EPV-12 is intended for oil flows up to a maximum of twelve (12) gallons per minute, the 

minimum down working pressure is 300 psi. 

10.1 SETTING THE OVER PRESSURE RELIEf VALVE 

The EPV Series valves are equipped with an adjustable relief valve that, when set, may be 

locked and sealed by an inspector. This is also a requirement of most enforcing authorities. As 

well, it is recommended that the relief valve be tested and set, even in jurisdictions where an 

inspection is not required. 

To set the relief valve, place a full load on the car and run the lift in the UP direction. Read the 

pressure gauge as the lift ascends, and mark down the pressure indicated. This is the working 

pressure of the lift. The relief must be set to open at a pressure not greater than 125% of the 

working pressure. If the indicated pressure was 800 psi, then the maximum relief pressure 

permissible by the code is 1000 psi (800 psi x 125% = 1000 psi). 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

To test the lift and set the valve, connect a jumper between TP1 and TP2 on the controller 

panel signal board of the Orion if the wiring is not completed. This will send power 

directly to the valve signal board. The connection of Temporary Run Buttons is also 

recommended. 

NOTE 

There is a facility to install a seal, if required by the inspector. The seal may be threaded 

through the holes in the domed cap and through the hole provided at one corner of the 

body of the valve. 

NOTE 

DO NOT exceed a working pressure of 1600 psi. 

115 of 145 



1) Remove the dome cap on the relief valve and expose the Allen Head adjusting screw 

and lock nut. Refer to Figure 116/J. 

2) Loosen the lock nut and place a ¼” (6 mm) Allen wrench in the adjusting screw. Initially, 

turn the adjusting screw out at least two (2) full turns. 

3) Close the Main Shut OFF valve with the rear handle. (Figure 116/A) 

4) Using the Temporary Run Buttons, press the UP button and let the motor come up 

to speed. Continue to allow the motor to run as the adjustment is done. Observe the 

pressure reading on the gauge. 

5) To increase the relief valve pressure, turn the screw in (clockwise). To reduce the 

relief pressure, turn the screw out (counter-clockwise). Turn the adjustor screw until the 

indicated pressure on the gauge is about 1000 psi. 

6) Release the button to stop the motor. Tighten the lock nut. The relief valve is now set. 

7) Install the domed cap. 

8) Open the Main Shut OFF valve. 

116 of 145 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)




D Check Valve 


F Pressure Gauge Shut OFF 

Valve 



PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 116 EPV 4-7 Variable Speed Valves 

H Manual Lowering Release 


J Relief Valve 

K Slack Rope Valve 

117 of 145 






D Check Valve 


F Pressure Gauge Shut OFF Valve 


H Manual Lowering Valve 

118 of 145 

figure 117 EPV-12 Variable Speed Valve 


J Pressure Relief Valve 

K Adjustable Slack Rope Valve 

L Check Valve 

M Down Solenoid Electrical 

Contacts 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 118 EPV-12 Valve Hydraulic Schematic 

119 of 145 



10.2 PRESSURE GAUGE 

(Figure 116/117 E, F) 

Every EPV valve is provided with a standard pressure gauge and a pressure gauge isolating 

valve. It is recommended that the gauge be isolated from the pressure line by turning the 

gauge isolating valve to “OFF”, unless the lift is being repaired or serviced. 

To return the gauge to “ZERO” pressure before closing the isolating valve: 

1) Rotate the handle of the Main Shut Off valve handle to the “OFF” position. 

2) Open the manual lowering valve by pulling on the red handle on the front of the valve. 

The gauge will return to “ZERO”. 

3) Turn the gauge isolating valve to the “OFF” position. 

4) Return the Main Shut Off to the “ON” position (parallel with the oil line). 

10.3 SLACK ROPE MONITOR VALVE 

(Figure 116/117 K) 

Each EPV valve is provided with a standard monitor to detect the occurrence of slack rope or 

“loss of pressure” in the hydraulic system. The device is non-adjustable and is permanently 

mounted in the body of the valve. If required, the EPV 4 and 7 valve may be removed for 

servicing, but otherwise needs no attention. The EPV 12 is also factory pre-set but may 

require adjustment. 

1) To test the valve, the technician must create a loss of pressure in the hydraulic system. 

This can be done by manually setting the safeties on the car, or supporting the car on 

the rail stops. 

2) Pull on the Manual Lowering Release (Figure 116/117 H) and observe the hydraulic 

plunger. There may be a slight movement of the plunger as the remaining pressure 

bleeds off. The plunger will remain in position while the manual lowering handle is held 

open, some slack cable may occur. 

120 of 145 

wARNING 

INSTALL THE RAIL STOPS AND SET THE SAfETY BRAKES BEfORE MAKING 

ANY ADJUSTMENTS UNDERNEATH THE CAB wHILE THE LIfT IS IN MOTION. 

fAILING TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN SEVERE INJURY. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

3) Raise the car with the Temporary Run Buttons connected at the pump control and 

repeat. 

4) Repeat the test using the Temporary Run Buttons to energize the down solenoid. There 

may be a slight movement of the plunger as the remaining pressure bleeds off. The 

plunger will remain in position while the DOWN solenoid is energized. Some slack 

cable may occur. 

5) To reset the valve, simply raise the lift from the safeties and allow pressure to return 

to the hydraulic system. The valve will automatically reset. Take care that any slack 

cable is carefully aligned with the sheave prior to raising the plunger and reset the slack 

(plank) cable switch on the sling of the cab. Refer to Figure 119. 


Tripping Pan 

Tripping Bar 

EPV 12 Adjustment (Slack Rope Monitor) 

1) Loosen the lock nut. Figure 117 K. 

2) Insert an Allen key in the adjusting screw and rotate counter clockwise to stop. 

3) Turn clockwise by 2 turns. 

4) Check operation and adjust as required. Clockwise increases the pressure required to 

bring the cylinder down. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

Slack Cable/ 

Plank Switch 

figure 119 Slack Cable Switch 

121 of 145 



10.4 LOw PRESSURE SwITCH 

122 of 145 

(AKA NEGATIVE PRESSURE SwITCH) 

(Figure 116/117 C) 

When activated due to loss of pressure, an electrical contact in the negative pressure switch 

on the left side of the valve will open the power supply to the DOWN solenoid. This switch 

has been factory set, but adjustment on site is possible. 

There is an adjustable screw on the end of the switch. Turning the screw clockwise will 

increase the pressure at which the contacts open . Turning the screw counter-clockwise 

will reduce the pressure at which the contact opens. Typically, the contact will open at about 

75-100 psi. 

1) To test the switch on-site, place the leads of a VOM test meter directly on the DOWN 

solenoid and across the two solenoid connections. Refer to Figure 116/117 E. 

2) Set the meter on low voltage direct current setting. With the lift operating in the DOWN 

direction, the meter should read approximately 24 Volts DC, because the solenoid is 

now energized. 

3) Stop the lift and close the handle of the main gate valve. Attempt to run the lift in the 

DOWN direction by placing a down call. 

4) If the main gate valve handle is in the open position, the pressure gauge will read 

ZERO. The test meter should read ZERO volts on the solenoid connections due to the 

contacts opening in the negative pressure switch. If there is power on the connections, 

adjust the switch as instructed. 

10.5 SEQUENCE Of OPERATION Of THE EPV VALVE 

The following functions (F#) are used to set the various speeds of the lift. 

UP Direction function Acronym 

UP start time delay (“F0” Function) F0 

UP high (normal) speed (“F4” Function) uH 

UP low (levelling) speed (“F3” Function) uL 

UP acceleration (“F1” Function) uA 

UP deceleration (“F2” Function) ud 

DOwN Direction function Acronym 

DOWN high (normal) speed (“F8” Function) dH 

DOWN low (levelling) speed (“F7” Function) dL 

DOWN acceleration (“F5” Function) dA 

DOWN deceleration (“F6” Function) dd 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

1) The EPV solenoid is fully closed, when a button is pressed to call or send the lift in 

the UP direction, power is applied to the valve circuit board and the microprocessor. 

2) On power up, the solenoid fully opens for a short period (about one second), when all 

the oil sent from the pump returns to the oil reservoir. This permits the motor to start 

up under very little load. 

3) This start time is adjusted using the “F0” UP Start TIme Delay setting is displayed 

on the valve circuit board. The microprocessor continues to send signals to the EPV 

solenoid as per the “F0” settings. 

4) When the timing of the “F0” setting has passed, the display changes to the “F1” UP 

Acceleration setting and the lift smoothly ACCELERATES. 

5) The valve circuit board display then changes from “F1” to the “F4” UP High Speed 

setting. 

6) When the elevator reaches its selected floor, the magnetic switch at that floor will 

send a signal to the controller that the elevator is at the correct floor. The processor 

starts the DECELERATION phase to the floor level. 

7) The display will indicate a change from “F4” back to “F2” UP Deceleration setting, 

and the lift will immediately start to slow down, as the solenoid responds to the new 

signal. The slow down distance from full speed to levelling speed is approximately 5” 

to 5 ½” (127 mm - 140 mm). (The distance depends on magnet length and both vary 

depending on speed). 

8) As the lift approaches within a few inches of the floor level, the display will change from 

“F2” to “F3” UP Levelling setting. 

9) The lift will slow to the preset “LEVELLING SPEED” and will continue ascending until 

the magnetic switch signals the next STOP. 

10) The process for the DOWN direction operation and speed signals is identical to the UP 

direction, except the EPV valve starts closed and opens to increase the DOWN speed. 

The function numbers are also different, for example, “F5” is the DOWN Acceleration, 

F6 is the DOWN Deceleration, “F7” is the DOWN Levelling, and “F8” is the DOWN Full 

Speed setting. 

10.6 DETERMINING SPEEDS 

A tachometer is recommended to set the speed setting of the lift. Refer to the recommended 

speed settings and the Installation Drawings for the rated speed of the lift. Note the 

recommended speed setting are not absolute and may have to be adjusted to suit the 

application. 

The Temporary Run Buttons must set up and wired, as instructed in the manual, refer to 

Section 5.2, Temporary Run Button Installation. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

123 of 145 



• Press the UP button to allow the lift will ascend at levelling speed. By holding 

in the UP button and pressing the High Speed button, the lift will accelerate to 

full speed. Note the rate of acceleration. The same procedure is required for the 

DOWN direction settings. 

• If a tachometer is not available to set the speeds, use a stopwatch and time the lift 

to set the speeds. A simple method to set the levelling speed is to use a standard 

landing doorway height. This height is usually 80” or 84” (2032 mm or 2134 mm). 

• For the DOWN direction, set the lift car with the platform opposite to the top of the 

door panel. This means the platform is now about 80”- 84” higher than the landing 

sill. Use the stopwatch (or the second hand of a watch) and start the lift down in 

slow or levelling speed. Time how long it takes to reach the bottom of the door or 

the landing level. It should take about one (1) minute, and the levelling speed will 

be approximately seven (7) feet per minute. 

• If the speed is faster, the time will be shorter than one minute, decrease the “F7” 

setting. (The lower the number is set, the slower the levelling speed.) 

• If the timing is longer than one minute, then to speed up the lift, the function “F7” 

will have to be increased. The technician should note that the time of one minute 

is only approximate, not absolute. The objective is to adjust the levelling speed to 

be approximately seven or eight (7 or 8) feet per minute. 

• Repeat the process for the UP direction levelling speed. Start at the landing level 

and time how long the lift takes to reach the top of the door panel. 

10.6.1 Set Speed without a Tachometer 

1) Time the UP fast speed by setting “F4” to the highest number, 96. 

2) Time how long it takes to travel the full distance from level at the bottom landing to level 

at the top landing. Note this time. 

124 of 145 

NOTE 

Before making any adjustments to the EPV, fully open the flow control on the jack 

assembly. Refer to Figure 48, pg. 45. On completion, turn to close the flow control until 

the speed is affected, back off ½ turn away from that point, then lock. 

3) Time how long it takes for the lift to travel from the level at the top landing to level at the 

bottom landing. The time should be approximately the same. 

4) If the DOWN travel time is significantly longer than the UP travel time, then the lift is 

travelling slower. To increase the speed in the DOWN direction, the “F8” setting must 

be increased. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

10.7 SPEED SETTING DESCRIPTIONS 

The recommended speed settings are starting points only, more adjustment may be 

required. 

EPV 4-7 F0 16 EPV 12 F0 16 

• F0 represents adjustment of the start time delay. 

The start time delay is the amount of time between motor start up and lift motion; this 

delay is usually only required on smaller lifts such as the INFINITY. Adjust the numbers 

higher to increase the start time delay and downwards to reduce the start time delay. 

EPV 4-7 F1 80 F2 60 EPV 12 F1 80 F2 40 

• F1 represents UP acceleration and F2 UP deceleration. 

Setting to a higher number shortens or makes the acceleration or deceleration harsher; 

setting to a lower number lengthens or softens the acceleration or deceleration. 

EPV 4-7 F3 50 EPV 12 F3 85 

• F3 represents UP levelling speed. 

Setting to a higher number increases the levelling speed; setting to a lower number 

decreases the levelling speed. 

EPV 4-7 F4 95 EPV 12 F4 95 

• F4 represents UP fast speed. 

Setting to a higher number increases the full speed of the lift; setting to a lower number 

decreases the full speed of the lift. 

EPV 4-7 F5 80 F6 55 EPV 12 F5 80 F6 55 

• F5 represents DOWN acceleration and F6 DOWN deceleration. 

Setting to a higher number shortens or makes the acceleration or deceleration harsher; 

setting to a lower number lengthens or softens the acceleration or deceleration. 

EPV 4-7 F7 25 EPV 12 F7 20 

• F7 represents DOWN levelling speed. 

Setting to a higher number increases the levelling speed; setting to a lower number 

decreases the levelling speed. 

EPV 4-7 F8 40 EPV 12 F8 30 

• F8 represents DOWN fast speed. 

Setting to a higher number increases the full speed of the lift; setting to a lower number 

decreases the full speed of the lift. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

125 of 145 



11.0 PROGRAMMING THE VALVE 

Each FUNCTION adjustment (F0 through F8) may be set to any number from 1 through 

96. Typically, the higher the chosen number is, the further the EPV solenoid will open 

and the faster the lift will move. Note the value displayed is not the actual speed but 

a percentage of the speed only. The settings are different depending on speed, jack 

assembly and type of lift or elevator. 

The valve PC board is also equipped with several switches and buttons for setting purposes: 

TEST / NORMAL / LEARN / STORE / ONES / TENS. Refer to Figure 120. 

TEST indicates valve programming and allows the reading of preset speeds. 

NORMAL indicates the elevator run mode, the settings cannot be viewed or changed. 

LEARN displays default settings or hold down and press TENS to change speeds. 

STORE will enable the changes of preset speeds to be saved. 

ONES allows changes to speeds by a segment of 1. i.e. 1, 2 3. 

TENS allows changes to speeds by a segment of 10. i.e. 10, 20, 30 or press during 

operation to view function acronyms. 

1) While the unit is running and the selector switch is on TEST (press the Temporary Run 

Button to run the elevator), then press the ONES and TENS buttons at the same time 

while a FUNCTION is displayed. 

2) When the display begins to flash, release both buttons. The processor is now in 

programming mode. 

3) While in the TEST mode, in order to scroll through the “F” functions, press the ONES 

button on the right side of the LED display. The left side of the display indicator shows 

an “F”. The right side of the indicator shows the FUNCTION chosen, a number from 0 

to 8. Choose the FUNCTION number that you wish to review, for example F8, DOWN 

Full Speed. Press the button slowly for each number increase or decrease. 

4) Once a desired FUNCTION is displayed, press the LEARN button to view the factory 

setting. 

5) Ensure that the magnets have been set at the floor levels as instructed in the manual, 

refer to Figure 69, pg. 65. It is recommended that each adjustment be performed in 

the following order: 

126 of 145 

NOTE 

The valve is programmed from 1 to 99, however, the use of numbers 97-99 is not 

recommended as it may cause problems. 

UP direction 

1. “F0” Function 





dOwN direction 






PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

If the processor detects no input from the technician for five (5) minutes, it will default back 

to the NORMAL mode, even if the switch is in TEST mode. Any changes made while in TEST 

mode will be lost, and the processor will default back to the settings, as they were when the 

technician originally entered TEST mode. The five-minute time limit restarts every time there 

is input into the processor. To permanently save the settings made while in TEST mode, the 

TEST switch must be returned to NORMAL before the five-minute delay passes. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 120 Valve Operator Board 

127 of 145 



11.1 SETTING SPEED 

1) Scroll using the ONES button to F8, press the button marked LEARN and the display 

will change from “F8” to a number between 1 and 96. The indicated number is the value 

set for F8. 

2) To check the speed of the lift for the F8 DOWN High Speed, ensure that the lift is high 

enough to be able to use the tachometer and read the current speed. Situate yourself 

and your co-worker in a safe position to place the tachometer on the lift. 

3) Press the DOWN and HIGH SPEED buttons at the same time, and the lift starts and 

accelerates to full speed as per the current setting of F8. Note the full speed with the 

tachometer. 

4) To adjust the DOWN speed, increase or decrease the F8 setting as required. To change 

the setting, press and hold the LEARN button while scrolling the ONES or TENS buttons. 

Adjust F8 to the lowest possible value while keeping the speed at the same rate. i.e. If 

lift runs down at the same rate as 70 and 50, select 50. 

5) Press the STORE button while holding in the LEARN button. The number is now 

temporarily stored for use by the processor. When the toggle switch is returned to 

NORMAL, permanent storage will occur. 

6) Check the DOWN speed again and compare it to the last measurement. The speed 

should have increased noticeably. If the speed still is not correct, adjust the settings 

up or down as indicated, to reach the desired speed. Use the same procedures just 

described for moving the settings. 

7) Once the DOWN speed has been set correctly, the next recommended setting is the 

DOWN levelling speed. This is Function F7 on the display. Position the lift to use the 

tachometer for measuring the DOWN levelling speed. 

8) Press the DOWN direction control button (without pressing the high speed button), 

and read the DOWN levelling speed. Five (5) f.p.m. to eight (8) f.p.m. seems to be the 

optimum setting, but this may vary depending on job site conditions. 

9) Press the LEARN button to review the current settings, adjust the settings as instructed 

for the DOWN full speed, using the F7 function. To reduce or speed up the lift, adjust 

the numbers either UP or DOWN. 

With the full speed and the levelling speed set, the lift can now be tested with a car or hall 

call to the bottom floor. It is preferable to be on the lift and watch it approach the floor. 

10) Take the lift UP the runway a short distance using the temporary buttons, and then press 

a DOWN call. Take note of the DOWN acceleration, whether rough, smooth, or taking too 

long to reach full speed. 

As the lift approaches the bottom floor, the magnetic switch will signal the lift to DECELERATE. 

If the deceleration is set too short, the lift will reduce its speed to levelling speed in a rough, 

jerky manner and remain in levelling speed for excessive time. 

128 of 145 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

If the setting is too long, the DECELERATION may take the lift directly to the floor with no 

slow down or past the floor level. The ideal length of slow down is about 4” to 5” (102 mm - 

127 mm), depending on speed of lift and length of the magnets. If the deceleration is too long, 

then the transition from high speed to levelling speed (deceleration) must be adjusted. 

11) To set the deceleration, press the LEARN button while the display indicates F6 to observe 

the current setting. To reduce (or make harsher) the deceleration, the F6 setting must 

be increased. Check the deceleration again and note if the number must be reduced or 

increased in order to provide a smooth approach to the floor. (When satisfied with the 

performance of the valve, return the TEST switch to the NORMAL position). 

12) The DOWN direction settings have been completed. 

13) The adjustment of the UP direction settings is similar to the DOWN direction settings . 

Place the processor in TEST mode and change the display to F0. 

14) Using the temporary buttons, start the lift in the UP direction at high speed. If there is 

any appreciable delay in the time between when the motor starts and the lift starts to 

move, the F0 function must be changed. Note that “appreciable delay” means any time 

beyond two seconds. As with all adjustments, a higher number means longer delay time 

and a lower number means shorter delay time. 

15) The UP direction full speed adjustment, function F4, should be set between 88 and 96. 

This closes the solenoid and the full amount of the oil produced by the pump and motor 

will go straight to the jack assembly. 

16) With the adjustments for UP and DOWN completed at the terminal landings, the 

technician can now install the magnets at the intermediate landings. It should not be 

necessary to further adjust the valve settings. The valve should automatically slow 

down and stop level at each intermediate landing. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

129 of 145 



11.2 ERROR MESSAGES 

Error Definition 

E1 Function value memory error, will repair itself, no adjustment needed 

130 of 145 

E2 Default function values used, scroll through functions and press STORE 

E3 

Valve is not connected, check connection between Main Control Board and 

Proportional Valve 

E4 Memory read/write error, faulty memory chip, contact Tech Support 

E5 

An UP and a DOWN command is received at the same time, check wiring at Main 

Controller, only 1 signal must be present 

11.3 EPV MAINTENANCE 

If DOWN leakage occurs clean or replace the valve components as follows: 

Refer to Figure 116/117. 

1) Down Solenoid Valve 

2) Manual Lowering Valve 

3) Reverse Flow Check Valve 

4) If the down speed is slow, there may be debris in the screen underneath the down 

solenoid valve. Remove the valve and clean the screen. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

12.0 TESTING OPERATION 

The following features must be verified as operational before the elevator can be released to 

the customer. 

1) Cab Key Switch (Optional) 

Verify that when the key is in the OFF position, the buttons on the cab station are inoperable. 

When turned ON, the landing buttons should be inoperable. 

2) Call Controls 

Verify that controls are inoperable whenever a landing door or the cab gate is left in the open 

position, or when the key switch is in the OFF position. 

3) Emergency Car Stop Button 

Verify that turning the stop key to the STOP position, stops the elevator from running and 

stops the doors from moving. 

4) Door Interlock 

Verify the following: 

a) Door Switch: Verify that when the door is left open, the car will not run in any 

direction from any station. Check all controls at all stations. 

b) Lock: Verify that the door is locked after 2 inches of movement away from the 

landing. If necessary, adjust the cam accordingly. 

c) Cab Panifold Gate: Verify that all controls are inoperable if the gate is left in the 

open position. 

d) Light Curtain: Verify that the Red LED is ON (static door frame side) when 

obstructed. Refer to Section 6.2 Light Curtain Installation. 

5) Pit Switch, Car Top Stop Switch, Overspeed Governor, Plank Switch, final Limit 

Switch 

Turning all switches to the OFF position should render all controls inoperable. 

6) Emergency Light 

Verify that the emergency light comes on anytime that the 110 volt power to the equipment 

is interrupted. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, NEVER STAND 

DIRECTLY UNDER THE CAB OR INSIDE THE 

HOISTwAY DURING TESTING. 

131 of 145 



7) Emergency Lowering 

Verify that when the power to the elevator (both 110 volt and 220 volts) is disconnected, the 

DOWN button controls in the cab remain operable allowing the cab to operate in the DOWN 

direction only. 

8) Cab Telephone (Option) 

Verify that the cab telephone is operable. 

9) Travelling Cable 

Make sure that the travelling cable is running free and clear from all obstructions while the 

cab travels to all floors being served. 

13.0 AUTOMATIC CAB LIGHTING 

1) CALLING THE ELEVATOR fROM LANDING CONTROLS 

Upon pressing the call button, the car lights automatically come ON. The elevator starts 

to move. The car will arrive at the landing with the car lights ON. 

2) ENTERING THE ELEVATOR 

If the elevator is at the same landing as the caller, then open the landing door or car gate 

to enter the elevator. The elevator interior lights will turn on automatically. 

3) POwER fAILURE 

If there is a power failure in the main power supply to the motor control (not the lighting 

supply), the COP lights will turn on as a safety feature. 

14.0 BEfORE LEAVING THE JOB SITE 

1. Clean up the work area. 

2. Make sure all anchoring bolts/nuts are securely tightened (i.e. rail 

brackets, rail joints, carriage, pump unit, and cab bolts/screws). 

3. Make sure all controls operate as outlined in “Testing Operation” section 

of this manual. 

4. Demonstrate the operation of the elevator. During this orientation, 

stress the importance of proper operation and required maintenance. 

5. Mount the operation instructions at an appropriate entrance level. 

6. Make sure excess aircraft cable has been cut from the clamp end. 

132 of 145 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

15.0 TEST REDUNDANCY CIRCUIT (TSSA, ONTARIO ONLY) 

15.1 REDUNDANCY BACK-UP TESTING wITH fIREMAN SERVICE 

After each test the “CPU” will detect the event and “shutdown” to prevent the elevator 

from restarting. The in use lights located in the hall station call registration buttons 

will flash to indicate that the controller is in shutdown mode. To avoid “nuisance” 

trips there is a built in time delay of less than 3 seconds before the controller will shut 

down. The relays may be held in the energized position by pushing up the manual 

latching lever on the top edge of the relay. 

181.10 Redundancy & Monitoring in Critical Circuits Tests 

a) Critical Component: PM1 Contactor 

Test Procedure: 

Redundant component: PM2 Contactor 

With the car sitting at any landing “push in” the PM1 contactor. The car will not move due 

to redundant contactor PM2. Additionally, the “CPU” monitoring system will detect the fault 

and not allow the car to run again. 

Repeat the test using PM2 contactor. 

b) Critical Component: U Relay 

Redundant component: “CPU”, SF1 & SF2 Relays 


While the elevator is moving in the up direction, latch in the “U” relay. When the car stops 

the “CPU” monitoring system will detect the fault preventing the elevator from restarting. 

The redundancy relays SF1 & SF2 will not energize thus opening the safety string. 

c) Critical Component: D Relay 



While the elevator is moving in the down direction, latch in the “D” relay. When the car stops, 

the “CPU” monitoring system will detect the fault preventing the elevator from restarting. For 

redundancy relays SF1 & SF2 will not energize thus opening the safety string. 

Contacts U 5/9 & D 5/9 are separately monitored. To test these contacts have the car level 

at a floor ready to run. Connect a temporary jumper from terminal block 6A to IN/6 on the 

PLC expansion module. This will simulate a failure of contact U 5/9 or D 5/9. With the car 

on automatic place a call to run the car to a different landing. The CPU will detect the fault 

and the car will not start. 

Remove the jumper and reset the CPU. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

133 of 145 



d) Critical Component: IAS Relay 

Redundant component: IAX Relay 


With the car on automatic operation, actuate relay IAS. 

The “CPU” monitoring system will detect the fault and not 

allow the car to run. 

Repeat for IAx relay. 

Relay contacts IAS 10/6 and IAX 10/6 are also monitored separately. To test these contacts 

have the car level at a floor ready to run. Connect a temporary jumper from terminal 4 to 

terminal IN/2 on the PLC expansion module. This will simulate a failure of contact IAS 10/6 

to open. The CPU will detect the fault and not allow the car to restart. 

Remove the jumper from terminal 4. 

Connect a temporary jumper from terminal 5B to terminal IN/2 on the PLC expansion module. 

This will simulate a failure of contact IAX 10/6 to open. The CPU will detect the fault and 

not allow the car to restart. 

Remove the jumper from terminal 5B and IN/2. 

e) Critical Component: DZ1 Relay 

Redundant component: DZ2 Relay, “CPU” 


The DZ1 & DZ2 relays are monitored by the “CPU” for welded contacts. With the car level 

at a floor and ready to run, place a call at another landing. Actuate DZ1 relay. When the 

Car stops for the next registered call the “CPU” will initiate shutdown and the car will not run 

again. 

Reset the “CPU” and repeat for relay DZ2. 

Contacts DZ1 5/9 & DZ2 5/9 are separately monitored. To test these contacts have the car 

level at a floor ready to run. Connect a temporary jumper from terminal block 3 to IN/0 on 

the PLC expansion module. This will simulate a failure of contact DZ1 5/9. With the car on 

automatic place a call to run the car to a different landing. When the car stops the CPU will 

detect the fault and the car will not restart. 

Reset the “CPU. 

Connect a temporary jumper from terminal block 6 to IN/0 on the PLC expansion module. 

This will simulate a failure of contact DZ2 5/9. With the car on automatic place a call to run 

the car to a different landing. Upon arrival at the next floor, the CPU will detect the fault and 

the car will not restart. 


134 of 145 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

f) Critical Component: SB1 Relay 

Redundant component: SB2 Relay, “CPU” 


The SB1 & SB2 relays are monitored by the “CPU” for welded contacts. With the car level 

at a floor and ready to run, actuate relay SB1. The “CPU” monitoring system will detect the 

fault and not allow the car to run. 

Reset the “CPU” and repeat for relay SB2. 

Contacts SB1 5/9 & SB2 5/9 are separately monitored. To test these contacts have the car 

level at a floor ready to run. Connect a temporary jumper from terminal block 24V to IN/13 

where normally closed contact SB2/10 connects to the PLC. Actuate relay SB1. The “CPU” 

monitoring system will detect the fault and not allow the car to run. 

Reset the “CPU” and repeat for relay SB2. 

g) Additional Monitored Relays: SF1, SF2, INX 

The relays listed above are also monitored for welded contacts. With the car on automatic 

operation actuate each listed relay one at a time. The “CPU” will detect the fault and not 


Relay contacts SF1 9/1 and SF2 9/1 are also monitored separately. To test these contacts 


terminal IN/1 on the PLC expansion module. This will simulate a failure of contact SF1 9/1 

to open. Run the car. The CPU will detect the fault and not allow the car to start. 


Connect a temporary jumper from terminal 5A to terminal IN/1 on the PLC expansion module. 

This will simulate a failure of contact SF2 9/1 to open. Run the car. The CPU will detect the 

fault and not allow the car to start. 

Remove the jumper from terminal 5A and IN/1. 

Relay contacts INX 9/5 and INX 6/10 are also monitored separately. To test these contacts 


terminal IN/4 on the PLC expansion module. This will simulate a failure of contact INX 9/5 


Remove the jumper from terminal 4 and IN/4. 

Connect a temporary jumper from terminal 6 to terminal IN/5 on the PLC expansion module. 

This will simulate a failure of contact INX 6/10 to open. The CPU will detect the fault and 


Remove the jumper from terminal 6 and IN/5. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

135 of 145 



h) Additional Monitoring: Car Door & Hoistway Bypass Switches. 

Disconnect the Wire to PLC input IN/10 where the second pole of the car and hoistway 

door bypass switches connect to the PLC. With the car on automatic operation place the 

Hoistway doors bypass switch in the bypass position. This will simulate a failure of the 1st. 

pole contact on the switch. Place a call to another floor. Upon arrival at the next landing, 

the CPU will detect the fault and the car will not restart. 

Reset the CPU. 

Place the Car door bypass switch in the bypass position. This will simulate a failure of the 

1st. pole contact on the switch. The CPU will detect the fault and the car will not restart. 

Reset the CPU and reconnect the wire to PLC input IN/10. 

181.20 Solid State Device Test 

Not applicable 

181.30 Software System Device Test 


181.40 Levelling Switches Test 

With the elevator at floor level jump out the “Up Level” switch sensor in the selector. The 

car will run up at level speed for one half of the “Dead Zone” (about 1/4 inch) and the “CPU” 

will initiate shut down. To Jump out the Up level sensor, remove the cover from the selector 

control box on top of the car. On the circuit board located in the control box jump “LU” 

(terminal I2) to terminal GND. 

136 of 145 

wARNING 

DO NOT connect terminal I2 to any terminal other than GND or damage to the 

selector will result! The elevator will reset once the short is removed 

With the elevator at floor level jump out the “Down Level” switch sensor in the selector. The 

car will run down at level speed for one half of the “Dead Zone” (about 1/4 inch) and the 

“CPU” will initiate shut down. To Jump out the Down level sensor, remove the cover from the 

selector control box on top of the car. On the circuit board located in the control box jump 

“LD” (terminal I1) to terminal GND. 

wARNING 



With the elevator at floor level jump out the door zone switch. (T25-4 [24V] to T22-9 [20X] 

in the controller). Send the car to another floor. The elevator will run to the floor, open the 

door and the “CPU” will initiate shut down. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

181.50 Single Ground Tests 

Ground any terminal in the safety string. [(24V, 2, 3, 4, 5A,5B, 6, 6A, 14 or 16) to GND]. Any 

single ground applied to the above terminals will prevent the car from running. 

With the doors closed and the car ready to run, ground terminal OUT/8 on the “CPU”. Place 

a call below the car. Relays U, SF1, SF2 will energize momentarily and the car will not 

move. With the doors closed and the car ready to run, ground terminal OUT/9 on the “CPU”. 

Place a call above the car. Relays D, SF1, SF2 will energize momentarily and the car will 

not move. 

284.10 Critical Circuits 

Make & Model of Relays & Contactors Identification Used in Dwgs 

IDEC RU4S-D24 (relays) 

U, D, IAS, IAX, INX, 

SB1, SB2, SF1, SF2, 

DZ1, DZ2 

Allen-Bradley 100-C30YJ-E10 (contactor) PM1, PM2 

Additional Tests Procedures Required for Electrical Equipment 

EI.4 NTSD: 

Remove the car top selector levelling magnets from the top and bottom landings. This will 

disable the primary means of slow-down. Run the car to the top landing. The up normal limit 

switch will open and stop the car near the top landing. 

Run the car to the bottom landing. The down normal limit switch will open and stop the car 

near the bottom landing. 

Reinstall the car top selector levelling magnets! 

EI.5 Phase 1 & 2 Load weighing Device: Does Not Apply 

EI.6 Phase 2 & Ground: 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

wARNING 

This test may damage the Master Dupline Module. Attempt only if required by local 

code. 

Initiate Phase 1 fire service recall. Put the car on phase 2 fire service. Open any hall fixture 

and one at a time short to ground the three wires that come through the shaftway wall. (The 

Dupline communications cable). Hallway fixtures will become inoperative. (See that the car 

is still operable on phase 2 fire service. (Fuse F7 on the relay logic board and fuse TR5 on 

the Dupline master module PC board will open). At the top landing short out the power feed 

(24H) connected to the hoistway access switch. (Fuse F6 will open). See that the car still 

operates on phase 2 fire service. Replace the fuses and reset the car to normal operation. 

137 of 145 



EI.7 Phase 1 & 2 Power off: 

With the car running on Phase 1 or 2 fire service, disconnect the mainline power. Restore 

power to the controller. The car should level down to the nearest landing and then continue 

with phase 1 or 2 operation. 

EI.8 Recycle Operation: Does not apply 

EI.9 Plunger Gripper: Does not apply 

EI.10 Phase 1 Under Special Conditions: Low Oil Return 

Place the car at an upper floor. Disconnect the motor leads from PM2 contactor. Place an 

up call and allow the controller to start up (the car will be unable to move) Initiate phase 

1 fire service. Within 30 to 60 seconds the low oil timer in the “CPU” will trip. If the car is 

above the fire recall landing it should return to the fire recall landing. If the car is below the 

fire recall landing, it will return to the lowest landing. Reconnect the motor leads! 

EI.11 Phase 1 Under Special Conditions: Battery lowering Return 

Place the car at an upper floor. Place a jumper from terminal 1 to terminal P4 in the controller. 

(extra pole of main line disconnect switch) Turn off the mainline disconnect to simulate a 

power loss. Initiate phase 1 fire service. If the car is above the fire recall landing it should 

return to the fire recall landing. If the car is below the fire recall landing, it will return to the 

lowest landing. 

EI.12 Phase 1 Under Special Conditions, Plunger follower: Does Not Apply 

EI.13 Phase 2 Under Special Conditions: 

With the elevator on phase 2 fire service near a lower landing, place a call at an upper 

landing and allow the car to start up. Place a jumper from terminal 1 to terminal P4 in the 

controller. (extra pole of main line disconnect switch) Turn off the mainline disconnect to 

simulate a power loss. The car should stop and flash the in car fire light. The car will only 

respond to calls below its current position. Simulate a low oil return by removing the motor 

leads from contactor 

PM2 and attempting to run up. After the low oil timer (in the “CPU”) actuates the car will only 

be able to run to floors below its current position. 

EI.14 Plunger follower Guide: Does Not Apply 

EI.15 Switch for Auxiliary power lowering: 

Place the car at an upper floor. Place a jumper from terminal 1 to terminal P4 in the controller. 

(extra pole of main line disconnect switch) Turn off the mainline disconnect to simulate a 

power loss. The car will recall to the lowest landing. Restore power and remove the jumper 

on terminals 1 and P4. Run the car to an upper landing. Turn off the mainline disconnect 

switch. The car will not move. 

138 of 145 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

EI.16 Negative Pressure Switch: 

Place the car at an upper Landing. Set a call at the bottom landing. When the car starts 

down remove the hatch wire from terminal 16. The car will stop. 

EI.17 Motor Phase Protection: 

Reverse two motor leads to simulate a phase reversal. The car will not move and within 120 

seconds the “CPU” will shut down the car and lower it to the bottom landing. 

EI.18 Emergency Power: Does Not Apply 

(189.00) Additional Tests 

a) Top of car inspection operation with open door circuits 

Turn the “Car Door Bypass” switch, or the “Hoistway Door Bypass” switch, or both of these 

switches to the ”Bypass” position. Test the non-response of car and hall calls, fire service recall, 

and levelling operation for all three conditions. 

Place the “Top of Car Inspection” switch in the “inspection” position and the “Car Door Bypass” 

switch in the “bypass” position. Verify that the car can move on inspection operation with the car 

door open, but all hall doors closed. 

Place the “Top of Car Inspection” switch in the “inspection” position and the “Hoistway Door 

Bypass” switch in the “bypass” position. Verify that the car can move on inspection operation 

with a hall door open, but the car door closed. 

Place the “Top of Car Inspection” switch in the “inspection” position, and both the “Car Door 

Bypass” switch and the “Hoistway Door Bypass” switches in the “bypass” position. Verify that 

the car can move on inspection operation with the car door and a hall door opened. 

b) Monitoring car and hall door contacts 

With the elevator at floor level: 

For car door contact test, jump car door lock contacts. 

For hall door contact test, jump hall door lock contacts. 

For hall and car door test, jump car & hall lock contacts. (see print for terminal numbers) 

Initiate opening of doors with “Door Open Button”, or a hall or car call. 

The “CPU” will detect the fault and shut down the elevator, preventing the elevator from 

restarting. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

If the car door is fully open while these tests are being done, the car door will not 

close. 

139 of 145 



15.2 REDUNDANCY BACK-UP TESTING wITHOUT fIREMAN SERVICE 

After each test the “CPU” will detect the event and “shutdown” to prevent the elevator 

from restarting. The in use lights located in the hall station call registration buttons will 

flash to indicate that the controller is in shutdown mode. To avoid “nuisance” trips there 

is a built in time delay of less than 3 second before the controller will shut down. The 

relays may be held in the energized position by pushing up the manual latching lever on 

the top edge of the relay. 

181.10 Redundancy & Monitoring in Critical Circuits Tests 

a) Critical Component: PM1 Contactor 

Redundant component: PM2 Contactor 


With the car sitting at any landing “push in” the PM1 contactor. The car will not move due to 

redundant contactor PM2. Additionally, the “CPU” monitoring system will detect the fault and not 

allow the car to run again. 

Repeat the test using PM2 contactor. 

b) Critical Component: U Relay 

140 of 145 



While the elevator is moving in the up direction, latch in the “U” relay. When the car stops 



c) Critical Component: D Relay 



While the elevator is moving in the down direction, latch in the “D” relay. When the car stops 



Contacts U 5/9 & D 5/9 are separately monitored. To test these contacts have the car level 

at a floor ready to run. Connect a temporary jumper from terminal block 6A to IN/6 on the 

PLC expansion module. This will simulate a failure of contact U 5/9 or D 5/9. With the car on 

automatic place a call to run the car to a different landing. The CPU will detect the fault and the 

car will not start. 



PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

d) Critical Component: IAS Relay 


Redundant component: IAX Relay 

With the car on automatic operation, actuate relay IAS. The “CPU” monitoring system will 

detect the fault and not allow the car to run. 

Repeat for IAx relay. 

Relay contacts IAS 10/6 and IAX 10/6 are also monitored separately. To test these contacts 


terminal IN/2 on the PLC expansion module. This will simulate a failure of contact IAS 10/6 



Connect a temporary jumper from terminal 5B to terminal IN/2 on the PLC expansion module. 

This will simulate a failure of contact IAX 10/6 to open. The CPU will detect the fault and 


Remove the jumper from terminal 5B and IN/2. 

e) Critical Component: DZ1 Relay 

Redundant component: DZ2 Relay, “CPU” 


The DZ1 & DZ2 relays are monitored by the “CPU” for welded contacts. With the car level 

at a floor and ready to run, place a call at another landing. Actuate DZ1 relay. When the 

Car stops for the next registered call the “CPU” will initiate shutdown and the car will not run 

again. 

Reset the “CPU” and repeat for relay DZ2. 

Contacts DZ1 5/9 & DZ2 5/9 are separately monitored. To test these contacts have the car 

level at a floor ready to run. Connect a temporary jumper from terminal block 3 to IN/0 on 

the PLC expansion module. This will simulate a failure of contact DZ1 5/9. With the car on 

automatic place a call to run the car to a different landing. When the car stops the CPU will 

detect the fault and the car will not restart. 

Reset the “CPU. 

Connect a temporary jumper from terminal block 6 to IN/0 on the PLC expansion module. 

This will simulate a failure of contact DZ2 5/9. With the car on automatic place a call to run 

the car to a different landing. Upon arrival at the next floor, the CPU will detect the fault and 

the car will not restart. 



PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

141 of 145 



f) Critical Component: SB1 Relay 

142 of 145 

Redundant component: SB2 Relay, “CPU” 

Test Procedure: Does Not Apply, ONLY TESTED ON fIREMAN SERVICE EQUIPPED 

UNITS 

g) Additional Monitored Relays: SF1, SF2, INX 

The relays listed above are also monitored for welded contacts. With the car on automatic 

operation actuate each listed relay one at a time. The “CPU” will detect the fault and not 


Relay contacts SF1 9/1 and SF2 9/1 are also monitored separately. To test these contacts 


terminal IN/1 on the PLC expansion module. This will simulate a failure of contact SF1 9/1 

to open. Run the car. The CPU will detect the fault and not allow the car to start. Remove 

the jumper from terminal 4. 

Connect a temporary jumper from terminal 5A to terminal IN/1 on the PLC expansion module. 

This will simulate a failure of contact SF2 9/1 to open. Run the car. The CPU will detect the 

fault and not allow the car to start. Remove the jumper from terminal 5A AND IN/1. 

Relay contacts INX 9/5 and INX 6/10 are also monitored separately. To test these contacts 


terminal IN/4 on the PLC expansion module. This will simulate a failure of contact INX 9/5 

to open. The CPU will detect the fault and not allow the car to restart. Remove the jumper 

from terminal 4 and IN/4. 

Connect a temporary jumper from terminal 6 to terminal IN/5 on the PLC expansion module. 

This will simulate a failure of contact INX 6/10 to open. The CPU will detect the fault and not 

allow the car to restart. Remove the jumper from terminal 6 and IN/5. 

h) Additional Monitoring: Car Door & Hoistway Bypass Switches. 

Disconnect the Wire to PLC input IN/10 where the second pole of the car and hoistway 

door bypass switches connect to the PLC. With the car on automatic operation place the 

Hoistway doors bypass switch in the bypass position. This will simulate a failure of the 1st. 

pole contact on the switch. Place a call to another floor. Upon arrival at the next landing, 

the CPU will detect the fault and the car will not restart. Reset the CPU. 

Place the Car door bypass switch in the bypass position. This will simulate a failure of the 

1st. pole contact on the switch. The CPU will detect the fault and the car will not restart. 

Reset the CPU and reconnect the wire to PLC input IN/10. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

181.20 Solid State Device Test 


181.30 Software System Device Test 


181.40 Levelling Switches Test 

With the elevator at floor level jump out the “Up Level” switch sensor in the selector. The 

car will run up at level speed for one half of the “Dead Zone” (about 1/4 inch) and the “CPU” 

will initiate shut down. To Jump out the Uplevel sensor, remove the cover from the selector 

control box on top of the car. On the circuit board located in the control box jump “LU” 

(terminal I2) to terminal GND. 

With the elevator at floor level jump out the “Down Level” switch sensor in the selector. The 

car will run down at level speed for one half of the “Dead Zone” (about 1/4 inch) and the 

“CPU” will initiate shut down. To Jump out the Down level sensor, remove the cover from the 

selector control box on top of the car. On the circuit board located in the control box jump 

“LD” (terminal I1) to terminal GND. 

With the elevator at floor level jump out the door zone switch. (T25-4 [24V] to T22-9 [20X] 

in the controller) Send the car to another floor. The elevator will run to the floor, open the 

door and the “CPU” will initiate shut down. 

181.50 Single Ground Tests 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

wARNING 



wARNING 



Ground any terminal in the safety string. [(24V, 2, 3, 4, 5A, 5B, 6, 6A, 14 or 16) to GND]. Any 

single ground applied to the above terminals will prevent the car from running. 

With the doors closed and the car ready to run. Ground terminal OUT/8 on the “CPU”. 

Place a call below the car. Relays U, SF1, SF2 will energize momentarily and the car will 

not move. 

With the doors closed and the car ready to run. Ground terminal OUT/9 on the “CPU”. Place 

a call above the car. 

Relays D, SF1, SF2 will energize momentarily and the car will not move. 

143 of 145 



284.10 Critical Circuits 

Make & Model of Relays & Contactors Identification Used in Dwgs 

IDEC RU4S-D24 (relays) 

U, D, IAS, IAX, INX, 

SB1, SB2, SF1, SF2, 

DZ1, DZ2 

Allen-Bradley 100-C30YJ-E10 (contactor) PM1, PM2 

Additional Tests Procedures Required for Electrical Equipment 

EI.4 NTSD: 

Remove the car top selector levelling magnets from the top and bottom landings. This will 

disable the primary means of slowdown. Run the car to the top landing. The up normal limit 

switch will open and stop the car near the top landing. 

Run the car to the bottom landing. The down normal limit switch will open and stop the car 

near the bottom landing. Reinstall the car top selector levelling magnets! 

EI.5 Phase 1 & 2 Load weighing Device Does not apply. 

EI.6 Phase 2 & Ground Does not apply. 

EI.7 Phase 1 & 2 Power off Does not apply. 

EI.8 Recycle Operation Does not apply. 

EI.9 Plunger Gripper Does not apply. 

EI.10 Phase 1 Under Special Conditions: Low Oil Return Does not apply. 

EI.11 Phase 1 Under Special Conditions: Battery lowering Return Does not apply. 

EI.12 Phase 1 Under Special Conditions: Plunger follower Does not apply. 

EI.13 Phase 2 Under Special Conditions Does not apply. 

EI.14 Plunger follower Guide Does not apply 

EI.15 Switch for Auxiliary power lowering Does not apply. 

EI.16 Negative Pressure Switch: 

Place the car at an upper Landing. Set a call at the bottom landing. When the car starts 

down remove the hatch wire from terminal 16. The car will stop. 

EI.17 Motor Phase Protection: 

Reverse two motor leads to simulate a phase reversal. The car will not move and within 120 

seconds the “CPU” will shut down the car and lower it to the bottom landing. 

EI.18 Emergency Power: Does not apply. 

144 of 145 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

(189.00) Additional Tests 

a) Top of Car inspection operation with open door circuits 

Turn the “Car Door Bypass” switch, or the “Hoistway Door Bypass” switch, or both of these 

switches to the ”Bypass” position. Test the non-response of car and hall calls, fire service 

recall, and levelling operation for all three conditions. 

Place the “Top of Car Inspection” switch in the “inspection” position and the “Car Door 


with the car door open, but all hall doors closed. 

Place the “Top of Car Inspection” switch in the “inspection” position and the “Hoistway Door 


with a hall door open, but the car door closed. 

Place the “Top of Car Inspection” switch in the “inspection” position, and both the “Car Door 

Bypass” switch and the “Hoistway Door Bypass” switches in the “bypass” position. Verify 

that the car can move on inspection operation with the car door and a hall door opened. 

b) Monitoring car and hall door contacts. 

With the elevator at floor level: For car door contact test, jump car door lock contacts. 

For hall door contact test, jump hall door lock contacts. 

For hall and car door test, jump car & hall lock contacts. (see print for terminal numbers) 

Initiate opening of doors with “Door Open Button”, or a hall or car call. 

The “CPU” will detect the fault and shut down the elevator, preventing the elevator from 

restarting. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

If the car door is fully open when these tests are being done, the car door will be 

prevented from closing. 

145 of 145 


APPENDIx A 

ELECTRICAL 

SCHEMATICS 

PN 250994 

PN 251614 (TSSA, ONTARIO, CANADA ONLY) 

REfER TO PACKAGE SHIPPED wITH PRODUCT


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

APPENDIx B 

PARTS LIST 

B-1 of 10 



KITS fOR MASTER PARTS BOx 

KIT # DESCRIPTION PARTS INCLUDED IN KIT 

251845 SPREADER CAB KIT 

ORION (1 PER JOB IF 

O.H. >= 131”) 

224001 PLATTEN PLATE, (x1) 

250929 CHANNEL SPREADER, 30” DBG (x1) 

207051 PREPACK_SAFETY 

(1 PER JOB) 

200546 WEDGE ROPE KIT 

(1 PER JOB) 

200009 TELEPHONE CABINET 

ASSEMBLY STAINLESS 

STEEL (IF S/S TEL CAB 

REQ) 

200545 YOKE ASSEMBLY KIT 

30” DBG (1 PER JOB) 

B-2 of 10 

104789 HEX HEAD CAP SCREW, 7/16”- #14 x 1” ZNC (x8) 

210053 SAFETY BLOCK W/ROLLER ASSEMBLY PRO LH (x1) 

210054 SAFETY BLOCK W/ROLLER ASSEMBLY RH (x1) 

102192 LOCK WASHER, 0.4375” SPNG ZNC 7/16” (x8) 

103023 BAG, SHIPPING 9 X 12 0.004 MIL (x1) 

207020 

207047 

WEDGE SOCKET S/A 3/8” (x2) 

ROPE WEDGE PREPACK 

200854 GUIDE RAIL SHIM 

200004 TELEPHONE BOX (x1) 

200007 TELEPHONE BOX COVER DOOR PLATE (x1) 

101477 PULL HANDLE, PHONE BOX BLK (x1) 

102304 CABINET HINGE, FERRARI (x2) 

100040 MACHINE SCREW, PHILLIPS HEAD #06-32x0.75” (x4) 

101205 WASHER #06 ZNC (x12) 

101220 LOCK WASHER #06 ZNC (x8) 

101113 HEX NUT, # 6-32 ZNC (x4) 

101837 MACHINE SCREW FLAT HEAD PHILLIPS 

#10-32 x 1.00” ZNC (x6) 

101210 FLAT WASHER #10 ZNC (x6) 

101223 LOCK WASHER #10 ZNC (x6) 

101116 HEX NUT, #10-32 ZNC (x6) 

103779 MACHINE SCREW TAP PHILLIPS HEAD #8 - 32 x 0.375” 

‘F’ (x2) 

200533 STIFFENER, TELEPHONE BOX (x2) 

215402 YOKE ASSEMBLY, 30 DBG (x1) 

207046 YOKE PREPACK (x1) 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


200010 TELEPHONE CABINET 

ASSEMBLY, BRASS (IF 

BRASS TEL CAB REQ) 

201351 READER FLOOR KIT 

(1 PER JOB) 

251848 CTIS W/FIREMAN 

SERVICE KIT (1 PER 

JOB IF 2 SPEED DOOR 

& FIREMAN SERVICE) 

251849 CTIS NO FIREMAN 

SERVICE (1 PER JOB 

IF MANUAL DOOR & NO 

FIREMAN SERVICE) 

251847 MOUNTING CAM/CAB 

ORION (1 PER JOB) 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

200004 TELEPHONE BOX (x1) 

200008 TELEPHONE BOX DOOR COVER PLATE BRS (x1) 

101477 PULL HANDLE, PHONE BOX BLK (x1) 

102304 CABINET HINGE , FERRARI (x2) 

100040 MACHINE SCREW, PHILLIPS HEAD #06-32x0.75” (x4) 

101205 WASHER, #06 ZNC (x12) 

101220 LOCK WASHER, #06 ZNC (x8) 

101113 HEX NUT, # 6-32 ZNC (x4) 

101837 MACHINE SCREW, FLAT HEAD PHILLIPS #10- 32 x 1.00” 

ZNC (x6) 

101210 FLAT WASHER, #10 ZNC (x6) 

101223 LOCK WASHER, #10 ZNC (x6) 

101116 HEX NUT, #10-32 ZNC (x6) 

103779 MACHINE SCREW, TAP PHILLIPS HEAD #8-32 x 0.375” 

‘F’ (x2) 

200533 TELEPHONE BOX STIFFENER (x2) 

202006 MOUNTING BRACKET, LEVELLING SELECTOR (x1) 

202001 MOUNTING BRACKET, SELECTOR TAPE (x2) 

201352 MAGNET TAPE/SELECTOR MOUNTING PREPACK, 

(x1) 

207121 WEDGE CLAMP TO TRAVEL CABLE PREPACK (x1) 

250894 INSPECTION STATION DUPLINE W/FS BOX (x1) 

250950 CAR TOP INSPECTION STATION MOUNTING PREPACK 

(x1) 

250895 BOX, INSPECTION STATION DUPLINE NO FS (x1) 

250950 CAR TOP INSPECTION STATION MOUNTING PREPACK 

(x1) 

250013 CAB WALL TO STILE BRACKET (x2) 

200182 DOOR ZONE CAM (x2) 

200846 CAM/VANE MOUNTING PREPACK (x2) 

210525 CAM MOUNTING BRACKET 

B-3 of 10 




250238 PREPACK SLING 101052 BOLT, CARG 1/2-13X1.5 BRE GR 5 (x18) 

(1 PER JOB) 101106 NUT, HEX 1/2#13 ZNC (x40) 

102193 WASHER, LOCK 0.500 SPNG ZNC 1/2 (x40) 

102189 WASHER FLAT 0.500 ZNC 1/2 (x56) 

100188 HHCS_1/2#13x2.00” BRE (x22) 

100172 HHCS_3/8#16x1.00” BRE (x22) 


102191 WASHER LOCK 0.375 SPNG ZNC 3/8 (x22) 

250966 GUIDESHOE_ASSY 8” LG HORIZON (x4) 

101094 NUT, HEX 7/16 ZNC (x16) 

102192 WASHER LOCK 0.4375 SPNG ZNC 7/16 (x16) 


103023 BAG, SHIPPING 9 X 12 0.004 NUK (x1) 

102186 NUT, HEX 3/8#16 ZNC (x4) 

251846 

200440 UPSTAND JACK SCREW 

KIT 2-3 1/4” (1 PER 

JOB) 

251719 CYLINDER ASSEMBLY, 

2.75” 

B-4 of 10 

CAR TOP PROP KIT 

(1 PER JOB IF O.H. < 

131”) 

250867 UPSTAND CAP (x1) 

250868 UPSTAND SCREW (x1) 

200439 UPSTAND JACK 2”-3 1/4 (x1) 

104110 HEX NUT, 1-1/4” SAE GR (x1) 

104277 RING TRNG 1.29” OD x 0.98” (x1) 

211199 

DOOR LOCK KITS 

SMART PRO-LOCK KIT LH ( INCLUDES HARNESS) 

211200 SMART PRO-LOCK KIT RH ( INCLUDES HARNESS) 

772310 PROLOCK, LH 

772311 PROLOCK, RH 

250225 PROP ASSEMBLY TOC SAFETY (x1) 

250191 PLATE, STRIKE W/ ASSEMBLY T-O-C PROP (x1) 

251674 HOISTWAY ASSEMBLY 2.75” CYLINDER OVR 264-288 

251704 TUBE ASSEMBLY, 2.75” CYLINDER OVR 264-288 

220547 GLAND NUT, CYLINDER ASSEMBLY 2.75” KWIK 

801465 SEAL KIT SK587 

801831 NIPPLE FITTING BLEEDER PER 3206B 

801986 SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW 1/4”-#28 X 2.50” 

103490 SQUARE HEAD PIPE PLUG NPT 1/2” 

104210 PLASTIC PLUG, #8 

DOOR LOCKS 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

000581 INSTALLATION MANUAL 

000586 OWNER’S MANUAL 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

HARDwARE 

201349 FLOOR ZONE/LIMIT SWITCH MOUNTING PREPACK 

201350 FLOOR ZONE HARDWARE PREPACK 

201351 FLOOR READER KIT 

201352 MAGNETIC TAPE MOUNTING PREPACK 

201353 BUFFER SPRING 60” ASSEMBLY PREPACK 

201354 SPARE HARDWARE, SAVER CLIP 

201355 PIT CHANNEL & BUFFER SPRING PREPACK 

207048 FISH PLATE PREPACK 

207125 MOUNTING BRACKET 1/2 CNCR ANCHOR PREPACK 

207131 MOUNTING BRACKET ASSEMBLY, UPSTAND POST PREPACK 

211431 UPSTAND MOUNTING PREPACK 

211432 JACK MOUNTING PREPACK, 2.5” AND 2.75” 

211433 JACK MOUNTING PREPACK, 3.25” 

221543 RAIL BRACKET PREPACK 

251814 OVERSPEED GOVERNOR PREPACK 

255001 WITTUR/ESI 2 SPEED DOORS HARDWARE KIT 

250994 APPENDIX A ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS 

DOCUMENTATION 

251614 APPENDIX A TSSA ONTARIO, CANADA ONLY ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS 

B-5 of 10 



B-6 of 10 

MISCELLANEOUS PARTS 

KIT # DESCRIPTION 

100088 MACHINE SCREW, FLAT HEAD PHILLIPS 1/4-20 x 2 

100950 GLASS, .25” x 4.75” x 28.25” 

101064 MACHINE SCREW, FLAT HEAD PHILLIPS #12-24 x 1/2” U/CUT 

101130 SCREW, SMALL PAN HEAD PHILLIPS #6 X 1/2” 

101196 FLAT WASHER, 1/4” USS 

101500 GASKET NEOPRENE, 1/4” x 1/4” 

101625 BEARING, NDL THRST.75od.312b.0781r 

101692 HINGE ASSEMBLY CF-8 PRO DOOR 

102115 BEARING, BRONZE OIL IMPREGNATED 

102174 PROLOCK EMERGENCY UNLOCKING KEY (NEW REVISION) 

102185 HINGE PIN, 0.310”D,1.75”L PRO DOOR 

102227 RIVET, SPEED 1/8” 

102354 LABEL, FIRE DOOR 2 HR PRODOOR 

103318 BRAILLE PLATE “1” W/STAR 3x4 J04 

103319 BRAILLE PLATE “2” 3x4 J04 

103371 BRAILLE PLATE “B” 3x4 J04 S/S 

103989 SINGLE LIMIT/ZONE SWITCH 

104318 PROGRAMMER DUPLINE GAP1605 

104428 BRAILLE PLATE B VC COP 

104473 BRAILLE PLATE 2 (MAIN) VC COP 

104681 RETAINER, SPRING GRIP-INTERNAL TOOTH 

200026 SWITCH INDICATOR MANUAL/AUTO DR VC 

200401 JUNCTION BOX CAR STATION ASSEMBLY 

200437 JUNCTION BOX HOISTWAY ASSEMBLY 

200438 TEMPORARY RUN BUTTON 

200528 BUFFER SHIM ASSEMBLY 4.25” HIGH 

200543 FLOOR READER KIT 

200549 FLOOR ZONE SWITCH MOUNTING BRACKET 

200550 FLOOR ZONE CAM ASSEMBLY 

201037 HALL STATION VOY/ORION MODL6 ST HS A 

205019 FRAME, W/A LH PRODOOR 

205106 PRO-DOOR ASSEMBLY, LH 

205133 COVER PLATE, HINGE ACCESS 

205226 PUSH PLATE, ALUMINUM PRODOOR 

205227 KICK PLATE, ALUMINUM PRO DOOR 

205230 FRAME, WINDOW W/ASSEMBLY PRO DOOR 

205233 BRACKET, GLASS MOUNTING VERTICAL DOOR 

205234 BRACKET GLASS MOUNTING HORIZONTAL DOOR 

205260 PULL HANDLE, PRO-DOOR MILL FINISH 

205270 STRIKER ASSEMBLY PRO-LOCK 

207407 SWITCH ASSEMBLY PIT STOP BOX 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

KIT# DESCRIPTION 

209095 DECAL LOW OVERHEAD 1” LETTERS 

209113 DECAL PIT PROP 

209128 DECAL USA ASME CODE A17.1-1996 

209163 DECAL BUMPER 

209170 DECAL ENTRANCE HOISTWAY SIDE FLOOR 1 

209171 DECAL ENTRANCE HOISTWAY SIDE FLOOR 2 

209175 DECAL ENTRANCE HOISTWAY SIDE FLOOR B 

210001 SLING CROSS BRACE 30” DGB 

210434 JACK BRACKET 2.50” & 2.75” 

250177 LIMIT/ZONE SWITCH UP/DOWN MOUNTING BRACKET 

250235 LIMIT/ZONE SWITCH ASSEMBLY, HONEYWELL 

221544 RAIL BRACKET, 30” DBG 

250006 TORSION ASSEMBLY BAR 30” D.B.G. 

250139 SIGN 1400 AUTO DOOR LANDING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 

250140 SIGN 1400 CAB OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 

250215 JACK BRACKET WELD ASSEMBLY 

250898 HALL WIRING KIT 3 FLOOR 

250932 OVER SPEED GOVERNOR 70 FT ROPE 

250943 LIFTING BRACKET ASSEMBLY 50’ ROPE 

250951 PREPACK, MANUAL/STANDARD DECALS ORION 

250979 CAR OPERATING PANEL ORION MODEL 4 ST/ST 3 LANDING 

250988 WIRING HOISTWAY ACCESS KIT 

250992 FLOOR ZONE LIMIT SWITCH NLU/NLD , (Top/Bot/Mid Floor) 

251208 HALL STATION ORION MODL5 ST/ST 1FL 

251210 HALL STATION ORION MODL5 ST/ST 3FL 

251213 HALL STATION ORION MODL5A ST/ST 2FL 

251216 HALL STATION ORION MODL7 ST/ST F R 

251427 STILE RETAINER KIT 

251588 MOUNTING BRACKET OPERATOR 2 SPEED DOOR R.H 

251589 MOUNTING BRACKET OPERATOR 2 SPEED DOOR L.H 

251590 CAR STATION INSPECTION BRACKET 

251606 PIT CHANNEL W/A 30DBG SAVER CLIPS 

251783 DUCT WIRE ASSEMBLY JUNCTION BOX TO CONTROLLER 

251846 CAR TOP PROP KIT 

301045 DATA ACCESS TERMINAL 

772290 CAR TOP SELECTOR HARNESS (VIRGINIA ) 

772291 CAR STATION HARNESS (VIRGINIA ) 

772296 PIT SWITCH HARNESS (VIRGINIA ) 

772303 TRAVEL CABLE 30FT TRAVEL 

772305 HARNESS VIRGINIA CONTROLS SWING DOOR 

772306 HARNESS VIRGINIA CONTROLS DC SWITCH 

772310 LOCK ASSEMBLY PRO SMART VC LH 

772328 2SP DOOR WITTUR HARNESS (VIRGINIA ) 

777131 CONTROLLER MAGNETIC POSITIONING SELECTOR 2-4ST 

777134 CONTROLLER MAGNETIC POSITIONING TAPE 40’ 

777140 OPERATOR PRO-DOOR AUTO LH VC 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

B-7 of 10 



B-8 of 10 

ELECTRICAL PARTS 

PART # DESCRIPTION 

102268 SWITCH KEY, N/O REMOVABLE OFF POSITION ONLY 

102269 SWITCH KEY, N/O REMOVABLE IN BOTH POSITIONS 

104260 PCA DUPLINE 4 INPUTS / 4 OUTPUTS 

105274 LIGHT CURTAIN, WECO 

104295 PCA DUPLINE 2 INPUTS / 2 OUTPUTS 

104318 DUPLINE PROGRAMMER 

104328 PCA DUPLINE 8 INPUTS 

104329 PCA DUPLINE 8 OUTPUTS 

104428 PLATE, TACTILE B VC COP 

104429 PLATE, TACTILE B (MAIN) VC COP 

104430 PLATE, TACTILE M VC COP 

104431 PLATE, TACTILE M (MAIN) VC COP 

104432 PLATE, TACTILE L VC COP 

104433 PLATE, TACTILE L (MAIN) VC COP 

104434 PLATE, TACTILE G VC COP 

104435 PLATE, TACTILE G (MAIN) VC COP 

104473 PLATE, TACTILE 2 (MAIN) VC COP 

104477 PLATE, TACTILE 1 VC COP 

104478 FUSE 0.05A 250V (FOR 301046) 

104479 FUSE 4A 250V (FOR 301046) 

104491 BASE RELAY SY4S-05 (301052) 

104492 CONTACTOR BLOCK 




200438 TEMPORARY BUTTON VC 

200743 SPEEDY JIG (RAIL ALIGNMENT FIXTURE) 

200790 GATE OPERATOR, LH 

200791 GATE OPERATOR, RH 

201114 CABLE ASSEMBLY CONTROLLER TO HALFWAY JUNCTION BOX, 40 FT 



221263 WIRING KIT, HALL 2FL GAL LOCK 



221266 WIRING KIT, COMMANDER 1FL FRONT 




221271 WIRING KIT, COMMANDER 2FL REAR 



250894 INSPECTION STATION BOX, DUPLINE FS BEEPER 

250895 INSPECTION STATIONBOX, DUPLINE 

250897 HALL WIRING KIT, 2 FLOOR ORION 



PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


250988 HOISTWAY ACCESS WIRING KIT, ORION 

250992 FLOOR ZONE LIMIT SWITCH ASSEMBLY (TOP, BOTTOM, MIDDLE) 

301037 DC POWER SUPPLY 

301038 BATTERY BACKUP (APC) 

301039 CONTACTOR (ALLEN-BRADLEY) 

301040 OVERLOAD CT7-24-10 (6-10) 

301041 OVERLOAD CT7-24-16 (10-16) 

301042 OVERLOAD CT7-24-24 (16-24) 

301044 PLC BASE UNIT 1764-28BXB 

301045 PLC DISPLAY 1764-DAT 

301046 MODULE MASTER SPEC 8111 

301047 PCA-VALVE OPERATOR 772048 

301048 PCA-RELAY BOARD ORION 

301049 PCA-RELAY BOARD VOY/INF 

301050 RELAY 4POLE 120VAC 

301051 RELAY 4POLE 24VDC TUNGSTEN 

301052 RELAY 4POLE 24VDC 

301053 FUSE 3A 500V 

301054 FUSE 1.5A 250V 

301055 FUSE 0.5A 250V 

301056 FUSE 1.5A 250V 

301057 FUSE 4A 250V 

301058 FUSE 5A 250V 

301059 FUSE 6A 250V 

301073 DATA ACCESS TERMINAL COVER 

301074 KEY DUPAR ILCO01-STOP 

301075 KEY DUPAR ILCO02-HA 

301076 KEY DUPAR ILCO03-FS 

301077 FIRE SERVICE KEY SWITCH MASS.-COP 

301078 FIRE SERVICE KEY SWITCH MASS.-HALL 

301079 BUZZER ALARM DUPAR 

301083 BATTERY 6V COP 

301155 EMERGENCY STOP TOGGLE SWITCH 

301156 BULB, REPLACEMENT RED 

301158 PCA- ALLEN BRADLEY MEMORY MODULE 

301159 ALLEN-BRADLEY CPU 

301164 PLATE, TACTILE 1 (MAIN) VC COP 

301165 EMERGENCY LIGHT ASSEMBLY-COP 

301167 DISPLAY HALL STATION 

301168 DISPLAY COP 

301169 BARREL FIRE SERVICE KEY 

301170 BARREL HA KEY 

301171 BULB 6V EM LIGHT 

301174 TAPE SPRINGS 

301176 BUTTON, COP/HALL - DUPAR US91 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

B-9 of 10 



301225 TRANSFORMER, CCXF 

301226 TRANSFORMER, DXF/LXF 

301227 CABLE AB TO MAST. MOD. 

301229 ROD, PUSH TO STOP 

301230 PUSH BUTTON, PUSH TO STOP 

301242 BUZZER ALARM 90DB 

301248 KEYSWITCH, SPRING LOAD R-OFF 

301294 KEYSWITCH, RUN/STOP RPCA1 

301325 FIRE SERVICE KEYSWITCH, NEW YORK-COP 

301326 FIRE SERVICE KEYSWITCH, NEW YORK-HALL 

301327 FUSE, 3 AMP 250 V 

301459 TAPE READER REPLACEMENT SHOE 

301479 PCA - EMERGENCY LIGHT CIRCUIT BOARD 

301504 CONTACTOR BLOCK, AUXILIARY N/O AB 

301505 CONTACTOR BLOCK, AUXILIARY N/C AB 

301506 FIRE SERVICE KEYSWITCH, COP, NEW JERSEY 

301507 FIRE SERVICE KEYSWITCH, HALL STATION, NEW JERSEY 

301327 FUSE 3A 250V MDA-3 

655102 CAPACITOR, 1000 UF 50V RAD 

772288 HARNESS, POTLIGHTS 

772289 HARNESS, CAR TOP STOP 

772290 HARNESS, CAR TOP STATION 

772291 HARNESS, CAR STATION 

772292 HARNESS, PLANK SWITCH 

772294 HARNESS, NLU/NLD/FL 

772296 HARNESS, PIT SWITCH 

772297 HARNESS, CAR TOP PROP 

772298 HARNESS, DOWN LIMIT 

772299 HARNESS, POWER GATE 

772301 HARNESS, 2 SPEED DOOR 

772302 HARNESS, TRAVELLING CABLE 20 FT PKG 



772305 HARNESS, SWING DOOR 

772306 HARNESS, DC SWITCH 

772312 HARNESS, CAR JUNCTION BOARD TO CTIS BOX 

777132 MAGNETIC POSITIONING TAPE 20 FT 




777131 MAGNETIC POSITIONING SELECTOR 2-4 STOP 

777139 MAGNETIC POSITIONING SELECTOR 5-6 STOP 

B-10 of 10 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

APPENDIx C 

VIRGINIA PLC 

CONTROLLER 

C-1 of 58 



1.0 PRE-INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND NOTES 

The following general rules and safety precautions must be observed for safe and 

reliable operation of your system. 

wARNING: THE ELEVATOR CONTROLLER MUST BE INSTALLED 

BY ExPERIENCED fIELD INSTALLATION PERSONNEL. THE fIELD 

INSTALLATION PERSONNEL MUST KNOw AND fOLLOw ALL THE RULES 

AND REGULATIONS PERTAINING TO THE SAfE INSTALLATION AND 

RUNNING Of ELEVATORS. ADDITIONAL INfORMATION fOR SPECIfIC 

DEVICES (SUCH AS THE VALVES, DOOR OPERATOR, ETC.) IS THE 

RESPONSIBILITY Of THE MANUfACTURERS Of THOSE DEVICES. 

wARNING: THIS EQUIPMENT IS DESIGNED AND BUILT TO COMPLY 

wITH ANSI A17.1 AND NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE AND MUST BE 

INSTALLED BY A QUALIfIED CONTRACTOR. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY 

Of THE CONTRACTOR TO MAKE SURE THAT THE fINAL INSTALLATION 

COMPLIES wITH ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE AND NATIONAL CODES, 

AND IS INSTALLED SAfELY. 

wARNING: THE 3 PHASE AC POwER SUPPLY TO THIS EQUIPMENT 

MUST COME fROM A fUSED DISCONNECT SwITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER 

wHICH IS SIZED IN ACCORDANCE wITH ALL APPLICABLE NATIONAL, 

STATE AND LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODES, IN ORDER TO PROVIDE THE 

NECESSARY OVERLOAD PROTECTION fOR THE CONTROLLER AND 

MOTOR. INCORRECT MOTOR BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTION MAY CREATE 

A HAZARDOUS CONDITION. 

wARNING: PROPER GROUNDING IS VITAL fOR THE SAfE OPERATION 

Of YOUR SYSTEM. BRING THE GROUND wIRE TO THE GROUND STUD 

THAT IS LABELLED “GND” OR “G1”. YOU MUST CHOOSE THE PROPER 

CONDUCTOR SIZE. SEE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE ARTICLE 250-95, 

OR THE RELATED LOCAL APPLICABLE CODE. 

C-2 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

2.0 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION AND wIRING 

2.1 Car and Hoistway wiring 

Review the schematics and field wiring diagrams before attempting to hook up the 

controller. 

2.2 Car Top Selector (Tape Reader) 

The pulsing-type Car Top Selector provides Floor Change/Slowdown signals and Levelling 

signals, as shown on the car top selector sheet in 

the schematic. The signals should be a normally Floor # Reset 1 ON Reset 2 ON 

open contact that closes as described below. 

1 NO NO 

1) RESET SWITCHES close at the floor, while 

the car is in the Door Zone. 

2) UP and DOWN LEVEL, and DOOR ZONE/ 

LOW LEVEL. 

The reset magnets at each terminal landing, as shown on the schematic, provide a positive 

reset at every floor. The reset magnets should be laid out as shown in the attached table. 

The Up Level Switch is a normally open contact that closes when the car is in the levelling 

zone below the floor, and the Down Level Switch is a normally open contact that closes 

when the car is in the levelling zone above the floor. The length of the levelling magnet 

determines the slow down distance, since slow down and floor change is initiated when the 

car rides on to the Levelling Switches. Position the levelling magnet so that when the car is 

floor level the Up and Down Levelling Switches are centered around the magnet, and both 

switches are open. 

The Door Zone Switch is a switch (or switches) activated by the levelling magnet when the 

car is within 3” (76 mm) of floor level. 

2.3 Terminal Landing Normal Limit Switches 

The Terminal Landing Normal Limit Switch is a normally closed contact that opens when 

the car has travelled 1” (25 mm) past floor level at a terminal landing. The car should not 

be on the Terminal Landing Normal Limit Switch when the car is floor level at the terminal 

landing. The Limit Switch will prevent the car from travelling further away from the normal 

area of car travel, but allows the car to run back towards the normal area of car travel. 

2.4 Terminal Landing final Limit Switches 

The Terminal Landing Final Limit Switch, where required by code, is a normally closed 

contact that opens when the car has gone a considerable distance beyond floor level at a 

terminal landing. It will prevent any further movement of the car in either direction. Consult 

the applicable codes for the proper setting of this switch. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

2 YES NO 

3 NO YES 

4 YES YES 

C-3 of 58 



2.5 Machine Room wiring 

Mount the controller firmly and install all required conduits before wiring the controller. 

Note where duct has been provided in the controller for customer access, before deciding 

where to locate conduit openings. 

3.0 START-UP INSTRUCTIONS 

If it is desired to run the car temporarily during construction, refer to Section 5.1 

Temporary Run Button Installation. Otherwise, proceed through each of these steps and 

checks . 

3.1 Before Applying Power 

The specific settings for the job must be set, as described in the following sections: 

9.4 Changing Settings and Features Overview 

9.5 BIT Features 

9.6 Description of Settings 

9.7 Floor Position Codes 

9.8 Protecting Values from Accidental Changes 

3.2 Power and Grounding 

C-4 of 58 

DO NOT ALLOw ANY METAL SHAVINGS TO GET INTO 

RELAYS OR CONTACTORS, OR IN BEHIND ELECTRONIC 

COMPONENTS, AS THIS COULD CAUSE SERIOUS 

DAMAGE TO PERSONNEL AND/OR EQUIPMENT. 

CONfIRM THAT THE VOLTAGE Of THE INCOMING 

POwER MATCHES THE CONTROLLER BEfORE 

APPLYING POwER TO THE CONTROLLER. 

Check the system for improper grounds before applying power to the controller. 

With the power off, remove the F3 fuse from the secondary of the main control circuit 

transformer (“CCXF”). Check the safety circuit (terminals 1 through 6, and 6A, 14, 16) for 

grounds. Using a Volt-Ohm meter connect one lead to terminal 35 (ground) and touch the 

NOTE 

If the fuses are not removed, the meter will read a short through the windings of the main 

control circuit transformer. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

other lead to each terminal to be tested. The resistance should be considerably greater 

than 100 ohms. 

With the fuse still removed, apply power to the controller, and verify that the voltage at the 

secondary of the main control circuit transformer (“CCXF”) is 110-125VAC. 

3.3 Input/Output wiring 

With the power off, and the fuse removed, check each input point for grounds, as 

described in the previous Section 3.2 Power and Grounding. If a ground is observed, 

check the schematic to determine if this is correct (it usually is NOT!). 

With the power off check each output for grounds, also check for shorts to the hot side 

(terminal 1). Note that some field devices, such as buzzers, will have very low resistance. 

3.4 Applying Power 

Remove all fuses before applying power. Re-insert the fuses, one circuit at a time, 

checking each circuit before adding the next. 

3.5 Motor Rotation 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

EACH OUTPUT POINT SHOULD BE ISOLATED fROM 

GROUND AND HOT SIDE. 

With a three phase motor, check that the motor is rotating in the proper direction by turning 

on the power. Observe the rotation of the motor using a pressure gauge, if it is incorrect, 

reverse the main power leads (L1, L2, L3) at the main line disconnect. 

C-5 of 58 



3.6 PLC Start Up Instructions 

Before making the final wiring connections note that the Dupline Master Module indicators 

and PLC status are correct as follows: 

Dupline Master Module 

• Yellow and Green LED’s ON solid 

• Red LED pulsing 

PLC 

• Run is ON 

• Comm 0 pulsing (in time with Red LED on Master Module) 

LED’s 

Start Up Procedure 

After completing the wiring and before connecting power, complete the following tests. 

1) Remove the wires from the terminals marked DUP PWR and DUP DUP from the 

hatch wiring on the right hand side of the relay board. Refer to the controller hook up 

schematics labelled VOY-INF HOOK and ORION HOOK. 

2) Remove the wires from the terminals marked DUP PWR and DUP DUP from the car 

wiring on the bottom edge of the relay board. Refer to the controller hook up schematics 

labelled VOY-INF HOOK and ORION HOOK. 

C-6 of 58 

Dupline Master Module 

PLC 

RUN 

COMM 0 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

3) Using a Volt/Ohm meter check the resistance between the following, the resistance 

should be greater than 1K Ohm (1000 ohms). 

a) GND and DUP PWR wires 

b) GND and DUP DUP wires 

c) DUP DUP and DUP PWR wires 

4) Go to each Dupline Module on both the car and hall landing stations and check the 

following using a Volt/Ohm meter: 

a) Continuity between DUP GND and GROUND, the reading should be less than 

0.5 Ohms; if the reading is greater than 1 Ohm check the wiring and connections 

at DUP GND and GROUND. 

5) Check the resistance between the following, the resistance should be greater than 1K 

Ohm (1000 ohms). 

a) DUP GND and DUP PWR (POW) 

b) DUP GND and DUP DUP (D+) 

c) DUP GND and DC+ 

d) DC+ and DUP DUP (D+) 

e) DUP PWR (POW) and DUP DUP (D+) 

6) Return to the controller and ground out the DUP DUP (D+) wires, go to each module 

and check for continuity between DUP GND and DUP DUP (D+). 

The reading should be less than 0.5 Ohms; if the reading is greater than 1 Ohm check 

the wiring and connections at DUP DUP and DUP GND. 

If the test is satisfactory replace the DUP DUP (D+) wires in the designated terminals. 

7) Return to the controller and ground out the DUP PWR (POW) wires, go to each module 

and check for continuity between DUP GND and DUP PWR (POW). 

The reading should be less than 0.5 Ohms; if the reading is greater than 1 Ohm check 

the wiring and connections at DUP DUP and DUP PWR (POW). 

If the test is satisfactory replace the DUP PWR (POW) wires in the designated 

terminals. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-7 of 58 



Verification of Low Voltage AC Lighting Connections 

1) Before powering the elevator, remove the travel cable plugs from T3, T4, T7 and T8 on 

the Car Station Junction Box. Refer to the electrical schematics labelled CAR WIRING. 

Turn on the AC power, set a Volt/Ohm meter for 200VAC check for power between: 

C-8 of 58 

a) CL1 and CL2 on the CAR WIRING terminals on the bottom edge of the relay 

board in the controller (machine room). 

Both readings should be approximately 24VAC. 

2) Go to the car station and check for voltage between the following pins on the travel 

cable. 

a) T7.1 and T7.2 

b) T7.2 and T3.8 

Both readings should be approximately 24VAC. 

If satisfactory, turn off the lighting disconnect and carefully replace the travel cable plugs 

on the designated terminals. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

4.0 fINAL ADJUSTMENTS 

When the controller is ready to be run in automatic, it is recommended that all adjustable 

features be checked. 

As the wiring is completed, the following modes of operation can be checked and used. 

4.1 Inspection Operation 

To run the car on Inspection Operation, the safety string (including the door contacts, 

terminal landing normal slowdowns, normals and finals) should be operational. 

The Doors Closed Input (6) should be energized, and input IN/3 should be ON. 

The Inspection Input (Dupline Input A2) should be energized, and Automatic Input (Dupline 

Input A1) should be de-energized. 

Pressing the Up Run and Run Buttons will energize the Inspection Up Input (Dupline Input 

A3), which will cause the Up Direction and Door Close outputs to come ON. 

When the Doors Closed Input comes ON, the UP Run Outputs for the motor and the valves 

will energize and the car will run up. 

4.2 floor Position and Slow down 

The floor relays may need to be reset when the controller is initially installed. This will be 

accomplished when the elevator is at any floor, due to the floor reset switches. 

Remember to install ALL the reset magnets at each landing. 

4.3 Position Indicators 

Verify that the floor position changes properly as the car goes past each landing. Floor 

change should take place at the slow down point before each landing. 

4.4 Car and Hall Calls 

To observe the operation of the car and hall calls, the system must be in automatic 

operation. Verify that all car and hall calls work. 

Each call will be cancelled when the car stops for the call, or when the doors start to reopen 

for the call if the car is already at the floor. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

If Collective Operation is not selected then only one call can be registered at a time. 

C-9 of 58 



4.5 Door Operation 

Verify that any required changes to the Door Operator are correct as per the electrical 

schematics. Check the physical Door Close Limits for proper operation. 

If the doors attempt to open for too long, the open cycle will be stopped. The car will then 

respond to other calls and try to open the doors again. 

If the doors fail to close properly within a preset time, the doors will re-open and try to 

close again. If the doors are closed, but the car does not run in response to a call, the 

doors will re-cycle and the car will try again. 

For very slow doors, the Door Stuck Timer, which initiates the Door Open and Door Close 

Fail, as described above, may need to be increased for more than 15 seconds. 

If the Nudging Operation is activated, the Light Screen will be disabled when the Nudging 

Operation has tripped AND the doors are fully open. If the Nudging Timer trips while the 

doors are closing, the Nudging Buzzer will activate and the Light Screen will remain active. 

If the doors re-open fully, the Light Screen will de-activate. The Safety Edge Input remains 

active on Nudging. 

4.6 fire Service 

Fire Service Phase 1 can be activated by turning off a Smoke Sensor input or by 

energizing the Hall Fire Switch ON Input. Confirm that the car returns to the correct Main 

and Alternate landings. Confirm that the car operates as required on Car Fire Service 

(Phase 2) operation. 

NOTE 

To reset Hall Fire Service (Phase 1), most codes require the Bypass input be energized. 

To disable Hall Fire Service, jump the Hall Bypass input ON. 

A17 2000 Code requires that the Smoke Sensors be in the normal operating condition 

(inputs ON.) 

NOTE 

If Car Fire Service (Phase 2) appears to be operating incorrectly, check the Door Open 

and Close Limits for proper operation. Most codes require that the doors be fully open 

before allowing a change in the mode of operation on Car Fire Service. Most codes 

require that Hall Fire Service (Phase 1) be in effect for the car to return automatically to 

the main fire landing when the Car Fire Switch is turned to the OFF position. 

C-10 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

4.7 faults 

Most faults can be reset by pressing the “F2” button on the DAT on the front of the CPU. 

They will also be reset by turning the main power off then back on. Putting the car on 

Inspection then back to normal/automatic operation will reset most faults. 

4.8 Stuck Button Timer 

If a car or hall call button remains on for an adjustable time, and other calls are registered, 

the stuck button call will be ignored, and the car will answer the other call(s). The car 

will return to the stuck button call as it answers other calls, and the stuck button timer 

sequence will be repeated. 

Troubleshooting: Check for stuck buttons. 

4.9 Up Run failure Timer 

If the car runs up for an adjustable time, without changing floors, then low oil/shutdown 

operation will be initiated. The Shutdown LED on the CPU will come on. The Shutdown 

could be caused by a low oil level; a problem with the motor starter circuit(s); or a problem 

with the up valve circuit(s). The car will stop running up, then return to the lowest landing 

and cycle the doors. It will then be shut down, with only the Door Open Button or Lowest 

Landing Car Call Button being operational. 

Troubleshooting: Check that the up output comes on; the “U” relay comes on; the Valve 

Board “UP” LED comes on; the “PM” contactor comes on; and the pump comes on. Check 

the oil level in the tank. 

4.10 Down Run failure Timer 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

The car will not be shut down in this condition, but will be delayed by the Stuck Button 

Time, prior to proceeding to the next call. 

NOTE 

If the main power fails (VR relay de-energizes) this will also initiate a shutdown signal. 

The car can run down indefinitely when going from floor to floor. If the car stops between 

floors, it will attempt to return to the next landing below it. If it cannot reach the next 

landing within 60 seconds, it will stop the down run, and return to normal service. In this 

condition it will not be able to answer a call at the current floor (as shown on the Position 

Indicator) but will be able to run to any other floor. 

C-11 of 58 



4.11 Dupline failure Timer 

If the PLC loses communication with the Dupline Master Module, or the Dupline Checking 

Input (Dupline Input A8 which is connected directly to Dupline Output B8) fails to flash then 

the car will shut down. This fault will reset when the Dupline starts communicating again. 

Troubleshooting: Check the dip switches on the Dupline Module (Sws 2, 4, 5 should be 

ON, the others should be OFF). Check the lights on the Dupline Master Module (the TX led 

should flash rapidly, and the other two LED’s should be on solid). The COMM0 led on the 

PLC should also be flashing at the same rate as the TX led on the Dupline Master Module. 

If the COMM0 led is not flashing, then the PLC is not receiving any communication; check 

the cable from the Dupline Master Module to the PLC. 

4.12 Contact fault (Redundancy Check) 

Several key signals are monitored to confirm their proper operation. In these cases, 

the input is compared to the internal corresponding signal in the PLC, and if there is a 

difference then a shutdown is initiated. The signals that are compared are: 

• “DZ1,DZ2” – Output 1 and Input 2 are compared to Input 14. 

• “U,D,PM” – Outputs 8 and 9 are compared to Input 15. 

• “SF” – Output 7 is compared to Input 9. 

If there is an error for more than 1 second, then a fault is logged and the elevator is shut 

down. This circuit checks for failed outputs, stuck relays or contactors and short-circuits. 

4.13 Levelling Switch failure Timer 

This fault is generated if the Up and Down Levelling Inputs are both on at the same time, 

while the car is on automatic operation. Troubleshooting: Check the selector. 

4.14 Door Zone failure Timer 

If either Door Zone Input stays on while the car is running between floors, this fault is 

generated. The car will shutdown at the next floor. Troubleshooting: Check the selector. 

4.15 Selector Reset fault 

As the car runs past each floor, it will reset to the floor position based on the reset magnets 

at that floor. If this disagrees with the floor position that is expected (for example if the car 

is running up from 2, it expects the next floor to be 3) then a fault is counted. If the count 

reaches 5 the car will shutdown. If the car passes a floor 25 times without a fault, it will 

reset the counter. 

Troubleshooting: Check the selector reset magnets. Especially watch the position indicator 

as the car passes each floor. If the position indicator changes twice as it passes a floor, 

then the reset magnet is missing or improperly placed. Check the selector instruction sheet 

that shows the proper layout for the reset magnets. 

C-12 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

5.0 MICRO-PROCESSOR HARDwARE DESCRIPTION 

5.1 Major Components 

The controller consists of the Micro-Processor system, Power Supply section, and Relay 

Interface. 

The Micro-Processor system consists of the Central Processor Board (CPU), which has 

the micro-processor central processing unit, and the appropriate hardware to communicate 

to the DAT display, and Input/Output boards. 

The Power Supply section includes the required transformers and fuses to power the 

Micro-Processor system and the Relay Interface. 

The Relay Interface includes the required relays and contactors to interface the field 

signals and devices to the micro-processor. This usually includes a printed circuit board for 

normal signals, as well as other relays or contactors for signals required for each specific 

job. 

5.2 CPU 

The Central Processing Unit (CPU) board contains the hardware that controls the inputs 

and outputs which control the elevator. 

5.3 LED Description 

The lights on the PLC CPU will all come on when the power is first applied. The POWER 

light will stay on, and the RUN light will flash during the self-check, then will stay on. The 

POWER and RUN light must both be on for normal operation. 

If the RUN light does not come on, check the Run Switch behind the hinged cover on 

the left of the CPU. The switch should be in the center (REM) position or the left (RUN) 

position. If there is not a specific hardware fault, the CPU can usually be forced into the 

Run mode by turning the switch to the RUN position then back to REM, or by cycling the 

power. 

If there is a hardware fault, the DAT (Data Access Terminal) will display the fault code, as 

described below. 

A software fault will not cause the PLC to go out of the run mode, but will display a fault in 

the fault log. Refer to the Fault section for a description of faults and possible causes. 

5.4 DAT (Data Access Terminal) 

Non-Existent Elements – When the DAT determines that an element number does not exist 

in the controller, the element value displays as three (3) dashes. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-13 of 58 



If the protection bit for an element is undefined, the DAT will assume that the element is 

unprotected. 

Controller Faults – The DAT checks for controller faults every 10 seconds. When the DAT 

detects a controller fault, the display shows “FL” in the element number field and the value 

of the controller’s major fault word (S2:6) is displayed in the value field. 

Pressing ESC while the fault is being displayed returns the DAT to its previous mode. The 

fault is not removed from the controller, just from the DAT display screen. The fault that 

was on screen will not display again and cannot be “recalled”. If a new fault is detected, 

it will be displayed. If the initial fault is cleared and returns at a later time, the DAT will 

display the fault at that time. 

Error Conditions – When the DAT detects an error in its own operation, it displays the error 

screen. The error screen consists of “Err” and a two-digit error code. 

The DAT can experience two (2) different types of errors, internal errors and 

communication errors. 

Internal DAT Errors – Internal DAT errors are non-recoverable. When the DAT experiences 

an internal error, it displays the error screen, and does not respond to any key presses. 

Remove and re-install the DAT. If this does not clear the error, the DAT must be replaced. 

Communication Errors – The DAT continually monitors the interface between the DAT and 

the controller to ensure a good communication path. If the DAT loses communication with 

the controller for more than three (3) seconds, it generates an interface time-out error. The 

DAT automatically attempts to re-establish communications. The error screen displays until 

the DAT regains communications with the processor. All key presses are ignored until the 

display clears. 

C-14 of 58 

NOTE 

If an element value is being modified when the fault is detected, the fault is stored until 

the modification is accepted or discarded. Then, the fault will be displayed. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

Error Code Description Caused by Recommended Action 

00 Interface time-out Communication traffic 

01 to 02 Power-up test failure Internal failure 

03 to 07 Internal error Internal failure 

08 Processor owned (1) 

09 Access denied 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

Another device has ownership 

of the controller 

Cannot access that file 

because another device has 

ownership 

31 to 34 Internal error Internal failure 

Add SVC instructions to ladder 

program 

Remove and re-insert the DAT. If 

failure persists, replace the unit. 



Release ownership by the other 

device. 

Release file ownership by the 

other device. 



(1) This error can occur after a download in which communications configurations are changed. This error can 

be cleared by removing and re-installing the DAT, or by cycling power to the controller. 

5.5 DAT (Data Access Terminal) Connectors 

COMM0 - Dupline Communication Connector 

The Duplex Communication Connector is a terminal block located in the upper left corner 

of the CPU board. A shielded twisted pair is used to connect the two CPU boards together. 

The shield is connected to the CPU board mounting screw (which is grounded) at ONE 

END OF THE CABLE ONLY. The termination jumpers next to the connector are factory 

installed on duplex systems. 

Incoming Power Connector 

The Incoming Power Connector is part of the terminal block used for the Outputs. The 

incoming power is 24VDC from the power supply. 

Input/Output Terminals 

The Input terminal strip is located along the top edge of the CPU base. The inputs are 

24VDC. The Output terminal strip is on the lower edge of the CPU base. The outputs are 

either dry relay contacts, or 24VDC signals. 

C-15 of 58 



5.6 Operating Instructions for the Allen Bradley Data Access Terminal (DAT) 

The DAT is used to display and change the adjustable settings for the controller. It is also 

used to display the Input and Output status and internal coil status, and the fault log. The DAT 

mounts on the front of the CPU (Central Processing Unit). It can be removed or installed with 

power on. When power is applied, the DAT will perform a self check, then display the setting 

of the first BIT value. 

Available DAT Settings 

The BIT settings enable and disable discrete features as described on the list of BIT 

settings. The DAT will show whether these are on or off. 

The INT settings determine the number of floors, Fire Service return landings, presets 

for timers, IO status, internal coil status, and fault log. The number of floors, fire service 

return landings, and timer presets can be set during installation, as required on each job. 

Changing a Setting 

C-16 of 58 

NOTE 

Make sure you understand the effects of any changes before changing any settings. 

NOTE 

For the value to be accepted by the program, INT-39 must be set to a value of 2513 and the 

F1 button on the DAT must have been pressed so that the light next to F1 is on. 

1. Press the BIT or INT button on the DAT, to select an on/off setting (BIT) or a value (INT or 

integer). 

2. Press the up or down button on the right of the DAT to select the setting or value to be 

changed. 

3. Press ENT to change the value of the setting or value being displayed. The value of the 

setting will start flashing. 

4. Press the up or down button to select the new value. Hold the button to scroll the new value 

more quickly. 

5. Press ENT to accept the new value, or ESC to escape without changing the value. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

Monitoring Input/Output Status 

The IO status and internal coil status are troubleshooting tools that allow the internal 

status of the CPU to be displayed. To display the IO or internal memory, set the value 

of INT-30 (Data Pointer) to the desired value, as shown in the chart below, then the 

status of the IO will be shown in INT-31,32, which each show the status of four discrete 

points that may be inputs, outputs or internal coils, depending on the value of INT-30. 

For INT-31, the bits are shown as 1,2,3 or 4, if they are ON, or 0 or blank if they are 

OFF. For INT-32, the bits are shown as 5,6,7 or 8, if they are ON, or 0 or blank if they 

are off. 

5.7 Dupline Input/Output Boards 

The Dupline Input/Output boards are used to connect the CPU with the field devices. 

All inputs (unless otherwise stated) are 24VDC, and outputs (unless otherwise stated) 

are 24VDC. 

The boards are available as 8-Input and 8-Output, 4-In/4-Out, or 2-In/2-Out boards. 

Wiring is done to the terminal blocks at the bottom of the IO boards. There are two 

LED’s on the boards. Both LED’s should be on during normal operation. The boards 

are connected back to the Dupline Master Control Module in the controller by three 

wires, Power, Ground and Dupline Signal. These wires should be run in a separate 

shielded twisted cable. Where possible, keep these wires away from other high voltage 

signals, especially motor wiring. 

5.8 Dupline Addressing 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

wARNING 

If values are changed without the password setting (INT 39) being set properly, or 

without F1 being set on, then when the password is set correctly and F1 is turned on, 

the previously entered values will be accepted. It is strongly recommended that all 

settings be checked before activating the password setting or setting F1 on, to make 

sure that improper values are not entered. 

Each Input/Output point is given a unique address by means of a hand-held 

programmer. The schematic shows the address of each point. If a board is replaced, 

the board must be set up with the SAME ADDRESSES as the board it was replacing. 

The boards are pre-programmed from the factory according to the intended use. If a 

board is to be used for different points, the points can be re-programmed as required. 

Refer to the Dupline instructions for the Dupline programmer for programming 

instructions. 

C-17 of 58 



6.0 SETUP GUIDE fOR PROGRAMMING THE ALLEN BRADLEY 

MICROLOGIx 1500 PLC 

1. Remove the blanking cover from the front of the PLC (if present) 

2. Install the DAT (Data Access Terminal). Turn off the power at the battery backup while 

installing or removing the DAT. 

6.1 Setting Bits 

1. Turn on the power at the battery backup. Press the pushbutton labelled ‘BIT’ a green 

led beside it should come on if it is not already lit up. The DAT should indicate a flashing 

‘00’ on the left of the display and a solid ‘ON-1’. This means that bit # 00 is turned on. 

2. The flashing value can be changed using the up and down arrows to the right of the 

display readout. Push the up or down arrows to scroll through the list of bits to see 

which bits are turned ‘ON’ and which are bits are turned ‘OFF’. 

3. To change the status of a particular bit use the up and down arrows to select the desired 

bit number. Push the button labelled ‘ENTER’ to change the status of the selected bit. 

At this point the readout on the right of the display should start flashing. Press the up or 

down arrows to change its status to either ‘ON-1’ or ‘OFF-0’. 

4. The first step in programming is to set the bit values required for your particular 

application. To do this, refer to the chart entitled ‘Bit Features’. It is located in Appendix 

C of the installation manual. In the bit features chart you will find a listing of all bit 

settings that can be turned ‘ON’ of ‘OFF’. 

5. Start setting bits by enabling any doors that are present on your elevator. Turn ‘ON’ the 

bit to enable any doors that are present and make sure to turn ‘OFF’ the bits for any 

doors that are not present on your elevator. 

• For a 2 stop elevator with a front door at the 1 st landing and front and rear doors 

at the 2 nd landing: 

• Turn ‘ON’ bit #’s: 00, 01, and 07 

• Turn ‘OFF’ bit #’s: 02 – 06, 08-11 

6. Doors at landings must be properly programmed correctly in order for the unit to run. 

Ensure that any doors which are not present are turned ‘OFF’. 

7. Bits number 12 to 20 are present to turn on or off any additional features that may or 

may not be present on your elevator. The pages following the Bit Features chart contain 

descriptions of the function of each bit listed in the chart. 

C-18 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

8. Bit number 21 must be properly set in order for the elevator to run. If fire service is 

not supplied on the elevator this bit must be turned ‘ON’ to disable fire service inputs 

and operation. If fire service is present on the elevator this bit must be turned ‘OFF’ in 

order for the fire service inputs and operation to work. Note that all smoke sensors and 

fire service key switches must be wired up to the controller as indicated in the wiring 

diagrams provided with the job. Note also, that fire service is only available on the 

‘Orion’ elevator. 

9. Bit numbers 22 to 35 are for enabling different elevator operations and codes that may 

or may not be applicable, depending on local code requirements. 

10. Bit number 36 should be turned ‘ON’ if there is a key switch in the car to enable car call 

buttons. This key switch is present on Infinity and Voyager elevators and is not present 

on Orion elevators. Turning this bit ‘OFF’ is required on all Orion elevators and may be 

desired if the user of an Infinity or Voyager elevator does not want to use the key switch 

to enable the car call buttons. 

11. Bit number 37 must be turned ‘OFF’ to enable the function of the Car Top Inspection 

Station. If the elevator is an Infinity or a Voyager or the Car Top Inspection Station is not 

present this bit must be turned ‘ON’ in order for the elevator to work. 

12. Bit number 38 to 46 are either ‘empty’ bits which do not have any function or they are 

bits used to enable different operational features of the elevator. 

13. Bit 47 should be turned ‘ON’ while the unit is undergoing installation or adjustment. This 

will allow the elevator to try and run despite running timers, jumped door lock contacts, 

etc., that would normally cause the elevator to shutdown. After all wiring and setup is 

complete this bit must be turned ‘OFF’ so the elevator will not run in an unsafe condition. 

Note on any PLC software that is revision 16 or higher this bit automatically times ‘OFF’ 

after 60 minutes and may have to be reset periodically during the installation process. 

6.2 Setting Integers 

1. After all bits have been set to their correct status you must set the integer values. 

Integers are similiar to bits, only they contain a number value instead of being ‘ON’ or 

‘OFF’. The value can be any number between -32768 and 32767 but will typically be a 

value between 0 and 1000. Integers are scrolled through and adjusted using the same 

method described above for changing and checking bits. 

2. To determine what the integer settings should be set to for your elevator reference the 

chart entitled ‘Listing of INT settings’ on page C-37. 

3. Integer number 00 must be set correctly for the elevator to run. This integer should have 

a value in it which matches the number of landings or stops present on the elevator. It 

must match the number of landings specified in bit number 00 to 11. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-19 of 58 



4. Integers 01 to 36 are used to adjust timers and settings used by different functions of the 

elevator. They may or may not be applicable to your particular application. The function of 

each integer is listed in the pages of the manual following the ‘Listing of INT settings’ chart. 

Note the elevator will operate with the default settings contained in these integers. 

5. Integer 37 is used to enable the various types of door operators supported by the Virginia 

Controller and it must be set correctly for the elevator to run. To set this integer correctly 

you must refer to the separate description for this integer in the installation manual. A chart 

tells you which value of integer 37 enables a certain type of operator. 

• Integer 37 setting of 1 would be required for 2 speed sliding doors. 

• Integer 37 setting of 6 would be required for automatic ProDoor and automatic gates. 

6. Integer 38 is used to enable different options or methods of operation of the elevator. It must 

be set correctly in order for the elevator to run. You must refer to the separate description 

for this integer in the installation manual to determine what its value should be. Following is 

a listing of the most common integer 38 settings: 

• For an Orion with 2 speed sliding doors this setting should be 146. 

• For an Infinity or Voyager with automatic operation this value should 

be 178. 

• For an Infinity or Voyager with constant pressure operation this 

value should be 182. 

7. Integers 40 to 47 contain fault codes that show the last 4 faults that were logged by the 

controller and the appropriate status codes for each fault. The fault code meanings and 

definitions of status codes can be found in Appendix C of the elevator installation manual. 

8. Your PLC should now be programmed to run. Check DC input lights on the PLC before 

trying to place a call. Inputs 3, 4, and 8 must be lit in order for the unit to run. Integers 30, 31, 

and 32 can be used to monitor the status of required Dupline inputs. See Appendix C of the 

installation manual for sections entitled ‘Monitoring I/O Status with DAT’ and the ‘Dupline 

Inputs’ chart to check Dupline inputs. 

6.3 Dupline Switch Settings 

SW 1 = OFF 

SW 2 = ON (Checksum CRC) 

SW 3 = OFF 

SW 4 = ON (Split IO Mode) 

SW 5 = ON (64 IO) 

SW 6 = OFF (Clear Data) 

Sws are on Master Module Interface # G3496-0006-700 

C-20 of 58 

NOTE: For 5 or 6 Ldgs, set SW 5 to OFF, for 128-IO. 

LOCATION (Loc): T = TOP OF CAR C = IN CAR H = HALL 

Remove the Input Stretching Capacitor on LU.LD. Optional on other Inputs marked “*” 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

Dupline Inputs 

The following inputs apply to a 2 stop Orion with 2-speed sliding doors, type 1 cab (ON/OFF on 

the same side), no fire service. The lift is level at the bottom landing with all doors closed, with 

the door zone on the tape reader. 

Name Description 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

Inputs 

(see above) 

Location Address INT-30 

AUTO Inspection Sw in Auto/Normal 1 T A1 INT-31 

INS Inspection Sw in Inspection 0 T A2 

INSUP Inspection Up Button 0 T *A3 

INSDN Inspection Down Button 0 T *A4 0 

IAS Car Inspection Acces Sw 0 C A5 INT-32 

LU Selector Level Up 0 T *A6 

LD Selector Level Down 0 T *A7 

Check IO Connect to Output B8 0 T *A8 

B1FP Selector Binary Floor Reset 0 T *B1 INT-31 

B2FP Selector Binary Floor Reset 0 T *B2 

B4FP Selector Binary Floor Reset 0 T *B3 

EE Electric Eye 4 C B4 1 

DOL/HDOL1 Door Open Limit / 1st Ldg Hall DOL 5 T/H B5 INT-32 

DCL/HDOL2 

Door Close Limit / 2nd Ldg Hall 

DOL 

0 T/H B6 

DOLR/HDOL3 Rear DOL / 3rd Ldg Hall DOL 0 T/H B7 

DCLR/HDOL4 Rear DCL / 4th Ldg Hall DOL 0 T/H B8 

1C 1st Ldg Car Call Button 0 C C1 INT-31 

2C 2nd Ldg Car Call Button 0 C C2 

3C 3rd Ldg Car Call Button 0 C C3 

4C 4th Ldg Car Call Button 0 C C4 2 

SE/HDC1 

Safe Edge/1st Ldg Hall Door 

Closed Magnet 

0 H C5 INT-32 

SER/HDC2 

Safe Edge Rear/2nd Ldg Hall Door 

Closed Magnet 

0 H C6 

HDC3 3rd Ldg Hall Door Closed Magnet 0 H C7 

HDC4 4th Ldg Hall Door Closed Magnet 0 H C8 

1CR 1st Ldg Rear Car Call Button 0 C D1 INT-31 

2CR 2nd Ldg Rear Car Call Button 0 C D2 

3CR 3rd Ldg Rear Car Call Button 0 C D3 

4CR 4th Ldg Rear Car Call Button 0 C D4 3 

DOB Door Open Button 0 C D5 INT-32 

DCB Door Close Button 0 C D6 

DOBR Rear Door Open Button 0 C D7 

DCBR Rear Door Close Button 0 C D8 

C-21 of 58 



Dupline Inputs cont. 

Name Description Inputs Location Address INT-30 

EC-ON Car Fire Sw in “ON” 0 C E1 INT-31 

EC-HOLD Car Fire Sw in “HOLD” 0 C E2 

ECOFF Car Fire Sw in “OFF” 0 C E3 

EER Rear Electric Eye 0 C E4 4 

EHON Hall Fire Sw in “ON” 0 H E5 INT-32 

EHOFF Hall Fire Sw in “OFF” 0 H E6 

EHBY Hall Fire Sw in “Bypass/Reset” 0 H E7 

EHON2 Remote Hall Fire Sw in “ON” 0 H E8 

1H 1st Ldg Hall Call Button 0 H F1 INT-31 

2H 2nd Ldg Hall Call Button 0 H F2 

3H 3rd Ldg Hall Call Button 0 H F3 

4H 4th Ldg Hall Call Button 0 H F4 5 

DUPLS Dupline Check 5 H F5 INT-32 

CAREN Enable Car Station 0 H F6 

IAUP Access Up Run Button/Sw 0 H *F7 

IADN Access Down Run Button/Sw 0 H *F8 

1HR 1st Ldg Rear Hall Call Button 0 H G1 INT-31 

2HR 2nd Ldg Rear Hall Call Button 0 H G2 

3HR 3rd Ldg Rear Hall Call Button 0 H G3 

4HR 4th Ldg Rear Hall Call Button 0 H G4 6 

HDCLR1 1st Ldg Rear Hall Door Closed 0 H G5 INT-32 

HDCLR2 2nd Ldg Rear Hall Door Closed 0 H G6 

HDCLR3 3rd Ldg Rear Hall Door Closed 0 H G7 

HDCLR4 4th Ldg Rear Hall Door Closed 0 H G8 

ZONE1 1st Ldg Zone Sw 0 H H1 INT-31 

ZONE2 2nd Ldg Zone Sw 0 H H2 

ZONE3 3rd Ldg Zone Sw 0 H H3 

ZONE4 4th Ldg Zone Sw 0 H H4 7 

HDOLR1 1st Ldg Rear Hall Door Open Limit 0 H H5 INT-32 

HDOLR2 2nd Ldg Rear Hall Door Open Limit 0 H H6 

HDOLR3 3rd Ldg Rear Hall Door Open Limit 0 H H7 

HDOLR4 4th Ldg Rear Hall Door Open Limit 0 H H8 

5C 5th Ldg Car Call Button 0 C I1 INT-31 

6C 6th Ldg Car Call Button 0 C I2 

5CR 5th Ldg Rear Car Call Button 0 C I3 

6CR 6th Ldg Rear Car Call Button 0 C I4 8 

5H 5th Ldg Hall Call Button 0 H I5 INT-32 

6H 6th Ldg Hall Call Button 0 H I6 

C-22 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

Dupline Inputs cont. 

5HR 5th Ldg Rear Hall Call Button 0 H I7 

6HR 6th Ldg Rear Hall Call Button 0 H I8 

HDC5 5th Ldg Hall Door Closed 0 H J1 INT-31 

HDC6 6th Ldg Hall Door Closed 0 H J2 

HDCR5 5th Ldg Rear Hall Door Closed 0 H J3 

HDCR6 6th Ldg Rear Hall Door Closed 0 H J4 9 

HDOL5 5th Ldg Rear Hall Door Open Limit 0 H J5 INT-32 

HDOL6 6th Ldg Rear Hall Door Open Limit 0 H J6 

HDOLR5 5th Ldg Rear Hall Door Open Limit 0 H J7 

HDOLR6 6th Ldg Rear Hall Door Open Limit 0 H J8 

ZONE5 5th Ldg Zone Sw 0 H K1 

ZONE6 6th Ldg Zone Sw 0 H K2 

Notes: With Revision 12, if the system has Front and Rear Non-Selective openings (no front 

and rear at the same landing) then program all rear signals as if it were a front opening 

EXCEPT inputs for DOLR, DCLR, EER, SER (all with 2-speed doors). 

Dupline Outputs 

NAME Description Location Address INT-30 

DO / GO Door Open ECI / Gate Open T A1 INT-31 

DC / GC Door Close ECI / Gate Close T A2 

NUD Front Door Nudge/Retiring Cam T A3 

NB Front Door Nudging Buzzer C A4 16 

DOR / GOR Rear Door Open / Gate Open T A5 INT-32 

DCR / GCR Rear Door Close / Gate Close T A6 

NUDR Rear Door Nudge T A7 

NBR Rear Door Nudging Buzzer C A8 

C1F Car or Main Ldg PI Bit 1 C,H B1 INT-31 

C2F Car or Main Ldg PI Bit 2 C,H B2 

C4F Car or Main Ldg PI Bit 4 C,H B3 

C8F Car or Main Ldg PI Bit 8 C,H B4 17 

EFS Fire Light (Phase1,2 or flash) T,C B5 INT-32 

AV Fire Audible Visible T,C B6 

EFS1 Fire Light, Phase 1 only H B7 

CHECK IO Connect to Input A8 T B8 

1C 1st Ldg Car Call Light C C1 INT-31 

2C 2nd Ldg Car Call Light C C2 

3C 3rd Ldg Car Call Light C C3 

4C 4th Ldg Car Call Light C C4 18 

PRO1 1st Ldg Pro Door Open H C5 INT-32 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

10 

C-23 of 58 



Dupline Outputs cont. 

PRO2 2nd Ldg Pro Door Open H C6 

PRO3 3rd Ldg Pro Door Open H C7 

PRO4 4th Ldg Pro Door Open H C8 

1CR 1st Ldg Rear Car Call Light C D1 INT-31 

2CR 2nd Ldg Rear Car Call Light C D2 

3CR 3rd Ldg Rear Car Call Light C D3 

4CR 4th Ldg Rear Car Call Light C D4 19 

TLU Up Car Lantern C D5 INT-32 

TLD Down Car Lantern C D6 

TLUR Up Car Lantern Rear C D7 

TLDR Down Car Lantern Rear C D8 

H1F PI Bit 1 (can shut off) H E1 INT-31 

H2F PI Bit 2 (can shut off) H E2 

H4F PI Bit 4 (can shut off) H E3 

H8F PI Bit 8 (can shut off) H E4 20 

UR Up Direction Indicator C E5 INT-32 

DR Down Direction Indicator C E6 

CAG Car Arrival Gong C E7 

Shutdown Shutdown Indicator - E8 

1AG/1UL 1 Arrival Gong / 1U Lantern H F1 INT-31 

2AG/2DL 2 Arrival Gong / 2D Lantern H F2 

3AG/2UL 3 Arrival Gong / 2U Lantern H F3 

4AG3DL 4 Arrival Gong / 3D Lantern H F4 21 

5AG/3UL 5 Arrival Gong / 3U Lantern H F5 INT-32 

6AG/4DL 6 Arrival Gong / 4D Lantern H F6 

PG Passing Gong C F7 

IUL In Use Light H F8 

C-24 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

Dupline Outputs cont. 

NAME Description Location Address INT-30 

1AGR/1ULR Rear 1 Arr Gong / 1U Lantern H G1 

2AGR/2DLR Rear 2 Arr Gong / 2D Lantern H G2 


4AGR/3DLR Rear 4 Arr Gong / 3D Lantern H G4 22 


6AGR/4DLR Rear 6 Arr Gong / 4D Lantern H G6 

PDC Pro Door Cease to Open H G7 

Not used G8 

PRO1R 1st Ldg Rear Pro Door Open H H1 

PRO2R 2nd Ldg Rear Pro Door Open H H2 

PRO3R 3rd Ldg Rear Pro Door Open H H3 

PRO4R 4th Ldg Rear Pro Door Open H H4 23 

NUDGE Front or Rear Nudge C H5 

NBUZ Front or Rear Nudging Buzzer C H6 

UR Up Direction Indicator C H7 

DR Down Direction Indicator C H8 

5C 5th Ldg Car Call Light C I1 

6C 6th Ldg Car Call Light C I2 

5CR 5th Ldg Rear Car Call Light C I3 

6CR 6th Ldg Rear Car Call Light C I4 24 

PRO5 5th Ldg Pro Door Open H I5 

PRO6 6th Ldg Pro Door Open H I6 

PRO5R 5th Ldg Rear Pro Door Open H I7 

PRO6R 6th Ldg Rear Pro Door Open H I8 

4UL 4th Ldg Up Lantern H J1 

5DL 5th Ldg Down Lantern H J2 

5UL 5th Ldg Up Lantern H J3 

6DL 6th Ldg Down Lantern H J4 25 

4ULR 4th Ldg Rear Up Lantern H J5 

5DLR 5th Ldg Rear Down Lantern H J6 

5ULR 5th Ldg Rear Up Lantern H J7 

6DLR 6th Ldg Rear Down Lantern H J8 

Notes: With Revision 12, if the system has Front and Rear Non-Selective openings (no front 

and rear at the same landing) then program all rear signals as if it were a front opening 

EXCEPT outputs A5,A6,A7,A8,D7,D8 

Rev 16 – UR and DR are disabled on Fire Service, URX and DRX are still active on Fire 

Service. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-25 of 58 



7.0 CONTROLLER NOMENCLATURE 

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION PARTS LIST ITEM NO 

D DOWN RUN RELAY A1 

DZ1-2 DOOR ZONE RELAYS A1 

FS FAST SPEED RELAY A1 

LIT CAR LIGHTING CUTOUT RELAY A1 

PM STARTER (ACROSS THE LINE START) B1 

SF1-2 SAFE TO RUN RELAYS A1 

U UP RUN RELAY A1 

VR VOLTAGE RELAY (OPTIONAL) A1 

PLP KWIKLOCK/PROLOCK UNLOCKING RELAY A1 

C-26 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

8.0 PARTS LIST 

ITEM DESCRIPTION MANUfACTURER PART NO 

RELAYS 

A1 4PDT, 24VDC, PLUG-IN RELAY 

CONTACTORS, STARTERS, OVERLOAD 

B1 ACROSS-THE-LINE STARTER (IEC) ALLEN-BRADLEY 100-C30YJ-E10 

B2 3 POLE OVERLOAD (IEC) ALLEN-BRADLEY 193-TA-Cxx 

TRANSfORMERS, fUSES, TERMINALS 

C1 460-230-208/230-115, 600VA RAM C-4797 

C2 250V INSTANTANEOUS FUSE LITTELFUSE TYPE BLF 

C3 250V FUSEHOLDER CURTIS PW1F 

C4 TRACK FOR 250V FUSEHOLDERS CURTIS SW192 

C5 3 POLE TERMINAL, 600V, 50AMP CURTIS 3PSWT 

C6 MOUNTING TRACK FOR TERMINALS CURTIS SW192 

MICRO-PROCESSOR 

D1 MICROPROCESSOR CPU ALLEN-BRADLEY 1764-LSP 

D2 BASE ALLEN-BRADLEY 

D3 DAT (DATA ACCESS TERMINAL) 

INPUT-OUTPUT MODULES 

MASTER MODULE DUPLINE SPEC8111 

8 INPUTS DUPLINE G21205501700 

4 INPUTS, 4 OUTPUTS DUPLINE G21405520700 

2 INPUTS, 2 OUTPUTS 

MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS AND HARDwARE 

DUPLINE G21404421700 

F1 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD V.C. MH-3 

F2 1”W X 2”H DUCT TAYLOR 91020 

F3 1”W X 3”H DUCT TAYLOR 91030 

F4 1”W DUCT COVER TAYLOR 99010 

F5 1”W DUCT MOUNTING CLIPS TAYLOR 08010 

F6 CONTROLLER ENCLOSURE PIEDMONT (SIZE) 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-27 of 58 



9.0 CONTROLLER DIAGNOSTICS USING DAT 

The DAT is used to display and change the adjustable settings for the controller. It is also 

used to display the Input and Output status and internal coil status, and the fault log. 

The DAT mounts on the front of the CPU (Central Processing Unit). It can be removed or 

installed with power on. When power is applied, the DAT will perform a self check, then 

display the setting of the first BIT value. 

9.1 Monitor features and Settings Overview with DAT 

The BIT values are ON/OFF settings that enable various features available in the 

controller. The INT values are integer settings (number of floors, timer values, IO status, 

fault log, etc.) Refer to the section on features and settings for details of all available 

settings. 

Press the BIT button on the DAT to view the BIT settings, or press INT to view the integer 

values. Press the up or down button bar on the right of the DAT to scroll through the 

various settings. 

To MONITOR settings continuously, press the F1 button so that the F1 light is ON. NOTE 

this is vital when monitoring the IO using INT30-32, or when looking at the Fault Log 

(INT40-47). If F1 is NOT on, then the value of INT30 can be changed but the values in 

INT31 and INT32 will NOT be updated until F1 is turned on. 

9.2 Monitoring the I/O Status with DAT 

The status of the local IO on the CPU is shown on the status lights on the PLC Base. 

To view the status of the Dupline IO, use INT30 as a pointer, and INT31 and INT32 as the 

data. 

• Press “F1” button so that the F1 led on the DAT is ON 

• Press “INT” to show the INT settings 

• Press the “Up” or “Down” button bar to scroll to INT30 

• Press “ENT” to enter the edit mode (the value on the right will start flashing) 

• Press the “Up” or “Down” button bar to change the value of INT30 

• Refer to the table for the proper value of INT30 to view each IO point 

• Press “ENT” when the desired value has been entered 

• Press the “Up” or “Down” button bar to view INT31 or INT32 

C-28 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

9.3 Monitoring Display format 

Examples of DAT Display to show format of INT-31 and INT-32 data. Numbers in light grey 

are for other data, and can be the number shown or blank or zero. They are shown just to 

show the relative position in the display. 

DAT DISPLAY DESCRIPTION - DATA FORMAT FOR INT31 

[31 1234] “1” in thousands column indicates point 1 is ON. 

[31 234] Blank in thousands column indicates point 1 is OFF. 

[31 1234] “2” in hundreds column indicates point 2 is ON. 

[31 34] Blank in hundreds column indicates point 2 is OFF. 

[31 1034] Zero in hundreds column indicates point 2 is OFF. 

[31 1234] “3” in tens column indicates point 3 is ON. 

[31 4] Blank in tens column indicates point 3 is OFF. 

[31 1204] Zero in tens column indicates point 3 is OFF. 

[31 1234] “4” in units column indicates point 4 is ON. 

[31 1230] Zero in units column indicates point 4 is OFF. 

DATA FORMAT FOR INT32 

[32 5678] “5” in thousands column indicates point 5 is ON. 

[32 678] Blank in thousands column indicates point 5 is OFF. 

[32 5678] “6” in hundreds column indicates point 6 is ON. 

[32 78] Blank in hundreds column indicates point 6 is OFF. 

[32 5078] Zero in hundreds column indicates point 6 is OFF. 

[32 5678] “7” in tens column indicates point 7 is ON. 

[32 8] Blank in tens column indicates point 7 is OFF. 

[32 5608] Zero in tens column indicates point 7 is OFF. 

[32 5678] “8” in units column indicates point 8 is ON. 

[32 0] Zero in units column indicates point 8 is OFF. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-29 of 58 



9.4 Changing Settings or features Overview 

To CHANGE settings, the Password setting (INT39) must be set to “2513” AND F1 must be 

ON. If BOTH of these conditions are not met then all settings except the password value 

(INT39) and the IO Pointer (INT30) will be “protected” and will not be changeable. 

• When F1 is on and INT39 is set to 2513, to change a feature 

• Press BIT or INT to select the feature to be changed 

• Press the Up or Down button bar to select the specific feature or value to be 

changed 

• Press ENT to enter the edit mode. The value on the right will flash 

• Press the Up or Down button bar to change to the new value 

• Press ENT to accept the new value, or ESC to exit without changing the value 

9.5 BIT features 

Use this selection to change the features described in the following table. Each feature is 

either ON or OFF. As you scroll through the features, the feature will be shown as 1-ON or 

0-OFF. The feature may be changed by pressing “ENT” then the Up or Down button bar, 

to select the desired operation (on/enabled or off/disabled), then press “ENT” to store the 

value. 

C-30 of 58 

MAKE SURE YOU UNDERSTAND THE EffECTS Of 

ANY CHANGES BEfORE ATTEMPTING TO CHANGE 

ANY SETTINGS OR fEATURES. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

List of BIT features 

The following settings apply to a 2 stop Orion with 2-speed sliding doors, type 1 cab (ON/OFF 

on the same side), no fire service. The lift is level at the bottom landing with all doors closed, 

with the door zone on the tape reader. (All features are normally OFF / disabled, unless 

otherwise specified). 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

# Standard DESCRIPTION – BIT SETTINGS 

00 ON Enable Front Door at 1 (ON) 

01 ON Enable Front Door at 2 (ON) 

02 OFF Enable Front Door at 3 (ON) 




06 OFF Enable Rear Door at 1 (ON) 






12 OFF Disable Short Door Time with Light Screen (OFF) 

13 OFF Enable Timed Electric Eye Cutout (OFF) 

14 ON Enable Nudging (ON) 

15 OFF Enable Infrared Curtain 

16 OFF Enable Hall Lanterns, Not Arrival Gongs (ON) 

17 OFF Down Lantern is One Stroke 

18 OFF Disable Arrival Gong from Car Call (ON) 

19 OFF Main Fire Door at Rear 

20 OFF Alternate Fire Door at Rear 

21 ON Disable Fire Service (OFF) 

22 OFF Enable A17 2000 Code (ON) 

23 OFF Enable New York Fire Code (ON) 

24 OFF Enable Chicago Fire Code (ON) 

25 OFF Enable Canadian Fire Code (ON) 

26 OFF Allow Run on Boris and Fire Service (ON) 

27 OFF Do Not Run on Shutdown and Fire Service 

28 OFF Allow Stop at Upper Landing on Shutdown 

29 OFF Enable 2nd Hall Fire Switch (2000 Code) (ON) 

30 OFF Enable Wisconsin Code (ON) 

31 OFF Enable Test Mode (ON) 

C-31 of 58 



C-32 of 58 

32 ON Disable PI Timed Out 

33 OFF Enable Homing (ON) 

34 OFF Disable TSSA Fault Check (OFF) 

35 OFF In Use Light ON Only if Out of Service 

36 OFF Enable Car Enable Switch (ON) 

37 OFF Disable Inspection 

38 OFF Run Slow Speed on Inspection 

39 ON Enable Collective Operation (ON) 

40 OFF Enable Negative Pressure Input (ON) 

41 OFF Enable A17 2005 and later Fire Code 

42 OFF Enable A17 2007 and later Fire Code 

43 Not used 

44 OFF Disable Doors and Door Locks (OFF) 

45 Not used 

46 Not used 

47 OFF Enable Shutdown Fault Defeat (Leave OFF) 

BIT Settings are ON/OFF, default is OFF unless otherwise noted. 

Description of BIT features 

00 Enable front Opening at 1st Landing - This feature is enabled if there is a front 

opening at this landing, or disabled if there is no front opening at this landing. 

01 Enable front Opening at 2nd Landing - This feature is enabled if there is a front 


02 Enable front Opening at 3rd Landing - This feature is enabled if there is a front 


03 Enable front Opening at 4th Landing - This feature is enabled if there is a front 






06 Enable Rear Opening at 1st Landing - This feature is enabled if there is a rear 

opening at this landing AND the elevator has selective openings. 

NOTE: This setting does not have to be enabled if the elevator is non-selective. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

07 Enable Rear Opening at 2nd Landing - This feature is enabled if there is a rear 


08 Enable Rear Opening at 3rd Landing - This feature is enabled if there is a rear 


09 Enable Rear Opening at 4th Landing - This feature is enabled if there is a rear 






12 No Shortened Door Time - Normally the door time will be shortened by the Door Open 

Button/Safety Edge/Electric Eye/Infra-red Curtain. Enable this feature to prevent these 

devices from shortening the door time. This is normally required in nursing homes, 

where the passengers need more time to enter the car. The Door Close Button will still 

shorten the door time. 

13 Enable Timed Electric Eye Cutout - Enable this feature to allow the Electric Eye input 

to be disabled after the preset time (see the setting above for the delay before cutting 

out the Electric Eye). This feature is often provided in the Electric Eye unit itself. 

14 Door Nudging - Enable this feature to activate door close nudging. Nudging will be 

initiated if a call is registered and the doors have been prevented from closing for the 

preset Door Nudging time. The Electric Eye will be disabled, the Nudging Buzzer will 

come on, and the Nudging Output will come on if the Electric Eye input is energized. 

This means the door will only close at slow speed if the Electric Eye is blocked. 

Note: Door Nudging operation requires an optional Nudging Buzzer output and 

Reduced Speed Door Closing output. 

15 Enable Infrared Curtain - Enable this feature if a Light Screen is used. Enabling 

this feature will cause the Safety Edge input to be disabled on Fire Service, and the 

Door Nudging feature to be initiated while the doors are closing on Fire Service. The 

Proximity Detector may be connected to the Safety Edge Input or the Electric Eye Input, 

as desired. (The Electric Eye Input is subject to the Timed Electric Eye Cutout and 

Nudging, whereas the Safety Edge Input is not.) 

Note: Door Nudging operation requires an optional Nudging Buzzer output and 

Reduced Speed Door Closing output. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-33 of 58 



16 Enable Hall Lanterns Not Arrival Gongs - This changes the operation of the Arrival 

Gong outputs to operate like Hall Lanterns. 

17 One Stroke Down Lanterns - The lanterns are normally provided with two strokes 

for the down direction. Enable this feature to provide only one stroke for the down 

direction. 

18 Enable Arrival Gongs from Car Calls - Allow the Arrival Gong to operate when the car 

is stopping in response to a car call. The Arrival Gong will always sound when stopping 

for a Hall Call. 

19 fire Service Main Landing Opening - If this feature is enabled, the Fire Service Main 

Landing will use the rear door if there are selective doors at that landing. 

20 fire Service Alternate Landing Opening - If this feature is enabled, the Fire Service 

Alternate Landing will use the rear door if there are selective doors at that landing. 

21 Disable fire Service - If this feature is enabled, then Fire Service Phase 1 and 2 will 

be disabled. 

22 A17 2000 fire Code - Enable A17 2000 Fire Code. 

23 fire Service NY City code - Enable this feature to select Fire Service Operation for 

New York City code. 

24 fire Service Chicago Code - Enable this feature to select Fire Service Operation for 

Chicago code. 

25 fire Service Canadian Code - Enable this feature to select Fire Service Operation for 

Canadian code. 

26 No BORIS Defeat - With this feature set, the car will automatically lower if it can, 

even if the car is on Fire Service. If the feature is NOT set, then the car will not lower 

on BORIS if the car is on Fire Service. If the car is on Inspection, the car may be run 

down, but not up. This feature requires BORIS circuitry to be installed on the controller. 

The setting of this feature will not affect the operation of the controller if BORIS is not 

provided. 

27 No Run on BORIS and fire Service - With this feature set, the car will not lower 

on BORIS if the car is on Fire Service. If the feature is NOT set, then the car will 

automatically lower if it can, even if the car is on Fire Service. If the car is on 

Inspection, the car may be run down, but not up. This feature requires BORIS circuitry 

to be installed on the controller. The setting of this feature will not affect the operation 

of the controller if BORIS is not provided. 

C-34 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

28 Stop at Main Ldg - With this feature set, the car will stop at the Main Landing when the 

car is on shutdown (low oil, Reverse Phase, Emergency Power, etc.). If this feature is 

NOT set, then the car will stop at the bottom landing. 

29 Enable 2nd Hall fire Sw - Enable the remote Fire Switch located at the Building Fire 

Panel. This switch is optional with A17 2000 Fire Code. 

30 Enable wisconsin Code - Enable the SB and IAS outputs to operate according 

to Wisconsin Code. (SB is always energized when the car is running. IAS is only 

energized after the car has stopped.) 

31 Enable Test Mode - Enables calls and door open signals to be input via INT28. See 

Entering Calls from the Controller. 

32 Disable PI Timed Out - Does not allow the Position Indicators to time out. 

33 Enable Homing - Enable this feature to enable the homing feature. This will cause 

the car to home to the Home Landing, when it has been idle for the adjustable Homing 

delay time. 

34 Disable TSSA fault Check - Turn ON to disable fault check for TSSA expansion 

module. 

35 In Use Light Operation - This feature is enabled to make the In Use Lights on SAPB 

controller operate while the doors are open or the car is running. 

36 Enable Car Enable Switch - Enable the Car Switch Operation. With this operation 

enabled either the car call buttons OR the hall calls buttons will operate, depending on 

the position of the Car Enable Switch. 

37 Disable Inspection - Disable the Inspection Inputs, and force automatic operation. 

38 Slow Speed on Inspection - Enable this feature to run slow speed on Inspection. This 

is normally required if the car speed is 150 ft/min or above. 

39 Single Button Collective Operation - This feature is enabled to select Single Button 

Collective Operation. 

40 Enable Negative Pressure Switch - Enable this feature to move the Negative 

Pressure Switch to Input 1 on the PLC (Ontario Only) 

41 Enable A17 2005 and later fire Code 

42 Enable A17 2007 and later fire Code 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-35 of 58 



43 Not Assigned 

44 Disable Door Open and Gate Open - This prevents a door open signal on normal 

operation. It may be used in tune-up or troubleshooting, to allow the car to be run 

without cycling the doors. This allows easy setup, without letting passengers enter the 

car. 



47 Enable Shutdown Defeat - Turn this feature on during initial setup. It will disable the 

shutdown features, such as run timers, Dupline failure timers, redundancy checking, 

etc. This allows the car to be set up before all external wiring is completed. 

Some installations require specific settings or features that are not included in the 

standard program. In this case, a separate sheet (or sheets) will be provided that 

describes the operation of these settings or features, and what the factory default 

settings are. 

C-36 of 58 

THIS fEATURE SHOULD NOT BE LEfT ON wHEN THE 

CAR IS IN NORMAL USE, AS IT DEfEATS KEY SAfETY 

CHECKING CIRCUITS. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

Listing of INT Settings 

The following settings apply to a 2 stop Orion with 2-speed sliding doors, type 1 cab (ON/OFF on 

the same side), no fire service. The lift is level at the bottom landing with all doors closed, with 

the door zone on the tape reader. (All features are normally OFF / disabled, unless otherwise 

specified). (NOTE: a value of -32768 to 32767 can be entered unless otherwise stated): 

# Typical Actual Description of INT Settings 

00 2 Number of Landings 

01 1 Fire Return Main Landing 

02 2 Fire Return Alternate Landing 

03 1 Home Landing 

04 500 Door Time for Hall Calls (0.01sec) 

05 200 Door Time for Car Calls (0.01sec) 

06 100 Shortened Door Time (0.01sec) 

07 5 Delay Before Locking Prolock/Kwiklock (sec) 

08 60 Running Fault (Low Oil) Time (sec) 

09 25 Door Nudging Delay Time (sec) 

10 20 Electric Eye Cutout Time (sec) 

11 30 Delay Before Homing (sec) 

12 20 Car Delayed Time (sec) 

13 15 Door Stuck Time (sec) 

14 4 Direction Hold Time on SBC (sec) 

15 6 Non-Interference/In Use Light Time (sec) 

16 300 Hold Car Light After Stop (sec) 

17 300 Position Indicator Shutoff (sec) 

18 10 Door Close Delay – Fire + Shutdown (sec) 

19 3 Hold Delay for CPPB Operation (sec) 

20 8 Code for PI Blanking 

21 2 Code For PI For LDG1 






27 100 Door Zone Fault Preset 

28 - Testing Calls 

29 - Program Revision Number 

30 - Pointer For Data Display (0-73) 

31 - Data for first 4 bits 

32 - Data for second 4 bits 

33 

34 

35 

30 Arrival Gong and Passing Gong Time 

36 (Sabbath Service Code) 

37 1 Door Code (See Separate Description) 

38 146 Bit Features (See Separate Description) 

39 2513 Password to Enable DAT 

40 - Status Code for 4th (Oldest) Fault Code 

41 - 4th (Oldest) Fault Code 

42 - Status Code for 3rd Fault Code 

43 - 3rd Fault Code 

continued on next page...... 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-37 of 58 



44 - Status Code for 2nd Fault Code 

45 - 2nd Fault Code 

46 - Status Code for 1st Fault Code 

47 - 1st (Most Recent) Fault Code 

C-38 of 58 

Set INT39 to password value AND turn ON F1 on DAT to enable DAT. 

9.6 Description of Settings 

00 Number of Landings - This is the number of landings that the controller can serve, 

and is a value between 2 and 6. This number should not normally be changed, since 

the inputs and outputs have to be assigned for the correct number of landings. If the 

controller is set up to serve future landings, then this value can be used to temporarily 

cut off future upper landings. This value also determines which floor the controller will 

reset to when a top landing reset is initiated with a pulsing selector. 

01 Main fire Landing - This is the number corresponding to the Main Fire Landing, and 

is a number between 1 and 6. The value set is based on the bottom floor being “1”, the 

2nd floor is “2” etc., even if this does not match the building designations. 

CAUTION: If it is set to a value greater than the number of landings served, the car will 

go to the top landing, but it will not open its doors. 

02 Alternate fire Landing - This is the number corresponding to the Alternate Fire 

Landing, and is a number between 1 and 8. The value set is based on the bottom floor 

being “1”, the 2 nd floor is “2” etc., even if this does not match the building designations. 

CAUTION: If it is set to a value greater than the number of landings served, the car will 

go to the top landing, but it will not open its doors. 

03 Home Landing - This is the home landing for a simple car for revision 11 programs 

and later. (Earlier revisions would home to the Main Fire Landing only.) The car can be 

selected to home to this landing, if desired. This value can be set to any valid landing, 

as determined by the number of landings setting. 

04 Door Time, Hall - This is the time in tenths of a second, that the doors will remain 

open, after they have opened fully, when the car has stopped in response to a hall call. 

After this time, the doors will start to close. 

NOTE: If a car call is entered while the doors are open, the door time will be reduced 

to the “Door Time, Car” setting. This setting is normally 50 tenths of a second (that is 5 

seconds). 

05 Door Time, Car - This is the time in tenths of a second, that the doors will remain open, 

after they have opened fully, when the car has stopped in response to a car call only. 

After this time, the doors will start to close. 

NOTE: If a car call is entered while the doors are open, the door time will be reduced to 

the “Door Time, Short” setting. This setting is normally 20 tenths of a second (that is 2 

seconds). 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

06 Door Time, Short - This is the time in tenths of a second, that the doors will remain 

open, after they have opened fully, when the doors have reopened in response to 

a Door Open Button/Safety edge/Electric Eye/Infra-red Curtain, and no hall call is 

entered. After this time, the doors will start to close. The normal setting is 10 tenths of a 

second (that is 1 second). 

07 Door Lock Delay Time - This is the time delay before releasing the power to the door 

lock. The normal setting is 5 seconds. 

08 Shutdown Time - If the car runs up without passing a floor for this time, then shutdown 

will be initiated. The car will stop, and run down to the bottom landing, and cycle its 

doors. It will then be shut down. The car can be returned to service by cycling the 

Inspection Switch, or the Main Line Disconnect Switch. The normal setting is 25 

seconds. 

09 Door Nudging Time - This is the time delay before initiating door close nudging, if 

that feature is provided. A call must be registered, and the car must be in automatic 

operation. The timer is reset when the doors get fully closed, or when the car starts a 

floor to floor run. The normal setting is 25 seconds. 

10 Electric Eye Cutout Time - This is the time delay before cutting out the Electric Eye 

Input, after it has been continuously energized. It is reset when the car runs to the next 

floor. The normal setting is 20 seconds. 

11 Homing Delay Time - This is the delay before homing a car to the home landing, after 

it has answered all calls, and is sitting with its doors closed. The normal setting is 10 

seconds. 

12 Car Stuck Time - This is the time delay before calls at the same landing as the car are 

disabled, so that the car can answer other registered calls. This operates as a stuck 

button timer. The normal setting is 15 seconds. 

13 Door Stalled Time - This is the time delay before stopping a door open or close cycle. 

The normal setting is 10 seconds. 

14 Direction Hole Time on SBC 

15 Non-Interference/In-Use Light Time - This is the time that the In Use Light will remain 

on after the doors have opened, before the Door Open Bell is activated. 

16 Hold Car Light After Stop - This is the time delay that the car lighting is left on before 

energizing the LIT relay, which turn off the car lights. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-39 of 58 



17 Delay Before Shut off Position Indicator - The delay before turning off the position 

indicator, if this feature is not disabled. The position indicator is turned off by sending 

it the code stored in INT20, which should be set to give the desired code for turning off 

the position indicator. 

18 Delay Before Close Doors on fire Service - This is the delay before closing the doors 

on Fire Service, with A17 2000 code, if the car is on battery backup. 

19 Hold Delay for CPPB Operation - This holds the car on constant pressure 

operation after the release of an up or down button. It allows the doors to operate after this 

time expires. 

20 Code for PI Blanking - The value sent to the Position Indicator to blank the display. 

This value may vary based on the manufacturer’s specifications. 

21 Code for PI for Ldg 1 - The code to display the desired value on the Position 

Indicator for the 1st (bottom) floor. Check the list of codes for the specific manufacturer to 

determine the proper value for each floor. 

22 Code for PI for Ldg 2 - see above. 





27 Door Zone fault Preset 

28 Car Call Manual Entry - Enter the desired value to enter specific front or rear car 

calls or the front or rear Door Open Button, as described in the section on entering car 

calls from the controller. 

29 Program Version - This value is set by the program (if changed, it will be reset on a 

power up). It indicated the program version. 

30 Pointer for Displaying Data - Enter the value to display the desired input, output, 

or internal memory data in INT31 and INT32. Refer to the section on Monitoring the I/O 

Status with the DAT. 

31 1st IO Data - This displays the first four data bits, as set by the data pointer in 

INT30. 

32 2nd IO Data - This displays the second four data bits, as set by the data pointer in 

INT30. 

C-40 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

33 Arrival Gong and Passing Gong Time 




37 Door Code - The door codes are combined into one INT setting, INT37. The proper 

number should be determined from the chart below (add up the desired features to get the 

desired number). 

Bit Value Description 

0 1 Enable 2 speed doors 

1 2 Enable power car gate 

2 4 Enable automatic Pro Door 

3 8 Enable GAL manual door locks 

4 16 Enable Commander door 

5 32 Park with car gate closed 

6 64 Disable hall door contacts (also set INT37 Bit 3) 

7 128 Force car gate open when car is idle 

8 256 Require hall door contact inputs for run 

9 512 Enable door open on hoistway access in door zone 

10 1024 (future) 

11 2048 (future) 

12 4096 (future) 

13 8192 (future) 

14 16384 (future) 

15 32768 (future) 

For example, to enable Power Car Gate (2) which will Park Closed (32) with Automatic Pro 

Door (4), set INT37 to 2 + 32 + 4 = 38. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-41 of 58 



38 Bit features - This value sets additional features that may be determined by Savaria 

Concord. The proper number should be determined from the chart below (add up the desired 

features to get the desired number). 


0 1 Prevent door close on Inspection with Car Door Bypass ON 

1 2 Disable Dupline Fault Check (currently required) 

2 4 Enable Constant Pressure Operation 

3 8 Allow both doors to operate on Battery Backup (not recommended) 

4 16 Disable Position Reset while car is running 

5 32 Electric Eye is normally open or is not provided 

6 64 Enable Constant Pressure like Inspection (not recommended) 

7 128 Disable False Down Level feature 

8 256 Enable automatic return on CPPB and battery backup/shutdown 

9 512 Always enable hall call buttons with car enable switch 

10 1024 Allow Door Close on Inspection when Run Button is pressed 

11 2048 (future) 

12 4096 (future) 

13 8192 (future) 

14 16384 (future) 

15 32768 (future) 

39 Password to enable DAT - This value must be set to the proper value to remove 

the protection from the DAT. 

40 Status for 4th fault Code - Refer to the Fault Logging description. 

41 4th fault Code - Refer to the Fault Logging description. 

42 Status for 3rd fault Code - Refer to the Fault Logging description. 

43 3rd fault Code - Refer to the Fault Logging description. 

44 Status for 2nd fault Code - Refer to the Fault Logging description. 

45 2nd fault Code - Refer to the Fault Logging description. 

46 Status for 1st fault Code - Refer to the Fault Logging description. 

47 1st fault Code - Refer to the Fault Logging description. 

Some installations require specific settings or features that are not included in the standard 

program. In this case, a separate sheet (or sheets) will be provided that describe the operation 

of these settings or features, and what the factory default settings are. 

C-42 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

9.7 floor Position Codes – Grey Code Pi 

A binary signal is sent to the Position Indicator. Codes for CE Position Indicator are shown 

below. Codes may be different for another manufacturer. Enter the desired codes for the 

appropriate floor in INT20 – INT26 to show the desired number on the PI Display. 

Listing in Binary Order 

Output Code Grey Code Display 

0 0000 - 

1 0001 B 

2 0010 G 

3 0011 M 

4 0100 2 

5 0101 1 

6 0110 L 

7 0111 0 

8 1000 BLANK 

9 1001 9 

10 1010 7 

11 1011 8 

12 1100 3 

13 1101 4 

14 1110 6 

15 1111 5 

9.8 Protecting Values from Accidental Changes 

To prevent accidental changes to any settings or features, it is recommended that the F1 

button be pressed so that the F1 light is OFF. Additionally, for extra security the value in 

INT39 can be changed from the password value of 2513. To be able to change values, 

INT39 must be set at 2513, AND F1 must be on. 

Entering the Password and turning on F1 removes the protection from all settings and 

features. 

• Press INT to select the integer settings 

• Press the Up or Down button bar to go to INT39 

• Press ENT to change the value 

• Press the Up or Down button bar to change the value to 2513 

• Press ENT 

• Make sure F1 is ON 

• The protection has been removed 

• To restore protection either turn off F1, or change the INT39 value 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-43 of 58 



9.9 fault Logging 

C-44 of 58 

NOTE 

Make sure f1 is pressed so that the values are being updated. 

The four most recent faults along with a status code, are stored in INT40-INT47. These values 

can be accessed like any other INT settings, by pressing INT then scrolling to the setting. 

Memory Addresses and fault Log function 

INT# DESCRIPTION 

47 1st (Most Recent) Fault Code 

46 Status Code for 1st fault 

45 2nd Fault Code 

44 Status Code for 2nd fault. 

43 3rd Fault Code 

42 Status Code for 3rd fault. 

41 4th (oldest) Fault Code 

40 Status Code for 4th (oldest) fault. 

fault Codes 

fault Code fault Description 

1 

2 

4 

8 

Running Shutdown Timer. The car ran for the time specified by the “Shutdown Time” setting 

without passing a floor. The car will stop and return to the bottom landing. It is reset by cycling 

power, cycling the Inspection Switch, or pressing F2 on the DAT. The probable causes are: (1) 

Low oil. (2) Up valve(s) did not operate properly. (3) Pump did not operate properly. Check that 

the setting of the shutdown timer is long enough for the car to run between floors. The normal 

shutdown timer setting is 45 seconds. 

Door Open Fault. The Door Open Limit Switch failed to open after the doors had been opening 

for the time specified by the “Door Fault” setting. The probable causes are: (1) The Door Open 

Limit failure. (2) door operator failure. (3) door control circuitry failure. 

Door Close Fault. The doors failed to close properly when they were parking, or when the 

car was ready to run for the next call. This fault will not be caused by keeping the doors open 

through the normal means (Door Open Button, Safety Edge, Infra-red Unit, etc.), but only if the 

doors should be closing but were not able to close. The probable causes are: (1) Door Close 

Limit failure. (2) Door Contacts failure. (3) door operator failure. (4) door control circuit failure. 

Emergency Power. The car went on Emergency Power. The Battery Backup will provide 

sufficient power to return the car to a landing. The car will normally return to the lowest 

landing, but this may depend on the applicable codes, and feature selections. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

16 

32 

64 

128 

256 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

Door Check Fault. Door Contacts were closed when the Door Open Limit was broken, and the 

Door Close Limit was closed. This indicates the Door Contacts were jumped. 

Door Zone Fault. The Door Zone Input was on while the car was running between floors. This 

indicates the Door Zone Relay or Input was stuck on. The car will shut down at the next floor. 

Redundancy Fault. The Input of one of the monitored points did not match the output from the 

PLC. The PLC monitors the SF1, SF2, IAS, IAX, INX, DZ1, DZ2, U, D, PM1, PM2 relays, and 

if one or more of these do not match the status of the corresponding output, then this fault will 

be generated. The car will shut down immediately. The fault can be reset by cycling the power 

or by pressing F2 on the DAT. 

Levelling Switch Fault. Both Levelling Switches were on at the same time. This indicates one 

of the switches have stuck on. If this fault occurs during setup, verify that the Levelling Sensors 

in the selector are adjusted so that they do not come on at the same time. 

Dupline Communication Failure. If the Dupline fails to communicate with the PLC, or if the 

Dupline A8 input does not cycle, then this fault will be generated. The fault will self-reset if 

the Dupline start communicating again. Verify that Dupline Output B8 is connected to Dupline 

Input A8, and, using the DAT, verify that the output and input are both toggling. 

512 Fire Service. This is not a fault, but a fault code is generated whenever Fire Service is initiated. 

1024 

2048 

Floor Reset Fault. Car reset its position too many times. This indicates a problem with the floor 

reset magnets on the selector. Check the positioning of the levelling and position magnets. 

TSSA Redundancy Check Fault. An additional input block is provided to check the status of 

contacts in the safety circuit. If any one of these inputs does not match the expected status, 

then this fault is generated. There is a time delay of 0.2 seconds before tripping this fault, to 

allow the relay(s) to change state and the inputs to be updated. 

If multiple fault conditions occur at exactly the same time, then the fault codes will be 

combined. For example, a fault code of 48 indicates faults 16 and 32 occurred at the same 

time. 

NOTE 

Press F2 on the DAT to reset all shutdown faults. Turn ON BIT47 to defeat all shutdown 

faults. 

C-45 of 58 



9.10 Status Codes 

The Status Code is a four digit number that shows information concerning the car when the 

fault occurred. 

The first digit of the Status Code shows the car position when the fault occurred. This is a 

number between 1 and 6, with “1” as the lowest landing, “2” the next landing, etc. 

The second digit shows the door position according to the following table: 

2nd Digit [46 1234] Front Door was... Rear Door was... 

C-46 of 58 

0 Fully Closed Fully Closed 

1 Partially Open Fully Closed 

2 Fully Open Fully Closed 

3 Fully Closed Partially Open 

4 Partially Open Partially Open 

5 Fully Open Partially Open 

6 Fully Closed Fully Open 

7 Partially Open Fully Open 

8 Fully Open Fully Open 

The third digit shows the status of the Door Inputs according to the following table: 

3rd Digit [46 1234] IN3 (Car Door Contacts) was... IN4 (Hall Door) was... Car was... 

0 Off / Open Off / Open 

Not At Floor 

Level 

1 On / Closed Off / Open 

Not At Floor 

Level 

2 Off / Open On / Closed 

Not At Floor 

Level 

3 On / Closed On / Closed 

Not At Floor 

Level 

4 Off / Open Off / Open 

At Floor 

Level 

5 On / Closed Off / Open 

At Floor 

Level 

6 Off / Open On / Closed 

At Floor 

Level 

7 On / Closed On / Closed 

At Floor 

Level 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

The fourth digit shows the status of the Selector Inputs according to the following table: 

4th Digit [46 1234] Selector Up Level was... 

Selector Down Level 

was 

Door Zone was... 

0 Off / Open Off / Open Off / Open 

1 On / Closed Off / Open Off / Open 

2 Off / Open On / Closed Off / Open 

3 On / Closed On / Closed Off / Open 

4 Off / Open Off / Open On / Closed 

5 On / Closed Off / Open On / Closed 

6 Off / Open On / Closed On / Closed 

7 On / Closed On / Closed On / Closed 

Example: 

INT-47 shows “512” and INT-46 shows “2144”, this would indicate the following: 

INT-47 = 512 indicates the most recent fault was that the system went on Fire Service 

INT-46 = 2xxx indicates the car was at the second landing 

INT-46 = x1xx indicates the Front Door was partially open, and the Rear Door was fully closed 

INT-46 = xx4x indicates the Door Contacts and Gate Contact were open, and the car was at 

Floor Level 

INT-46 = xxx4 indicates the car was in the Door Zone but not on either Levelling Switch. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-47 of 58 



10.0 TROUBLESHOOTING SUGGESTIONS 

C-48 of 58 

NOTE 

It is recommended that all faults are set to 0 before leaving the installation site. (INT 47, 45, 

43, 4) The time and date must be recorded in the log book prior to leaving the site. 

10.1 Locating faults 

During installation, use the IO monitoring feature to verify that the IO is working properly 

Once the system has been installed, and is running properly, the most common problem 

will be the failure of an external device. The first step in locating the cause is to determine 

whether the fault is in the micro-processor or whether it is in the external wiring. For example, 

if a position indicator light is not lit, check the output module for the appropriate output point 

to determine if the micro-processor is trying to turn the light on or not. If the output light is 

on, then confirm that there is voltage at the module terminal. If there is voltage at the module 

terminal, then the problem is external to the micro-processor. It could be in the wiring to the 

position indicator, or perhaps the position indicator light has burned out. Similarly with input 

points, check that the input module light is on, that there is power at the terminal, and if not 

then the problem is external. 

If an input or output board fails, it may be possible to temporarily replace that defective board 

with another board that is used for non-essential functions (such as call register lights), thus 

providing elevator service while a replacement board is being obtained. See the section on 

“I/O Board Replacement” for further information. 

If this does not correct the problem, the power supply or the CPU module could be faulty. 

If the CPU fails, it will probably stop flashing LED L5. The CPU and I/O modules can be 

affected by high transient surges in the power supply, such as the building being hit by 

lightning. This may damage the CPU, or alter the contents of the program. Proper grounding 

will protect the controller from most of these problems. 

10.2 Relay Description And Operation 

VR Energized during normal power. De-energized when power is off, or car is on Battery 

rescue operation. 

U Energized when running up. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

D Energized when running down. 

FS Energized when running fast speed. Will drop when the car hits the levelling magnet 

of the destination floor. 

SF1 Energized when the car is running. It remains on after the stop to allow the valve 

board to stay on briefly. When it is off, the Car Door Contact and Hall Door Contact 

inputs are reconnected so that each can be checked to make sure they are not 

jumped. If either input goes on when the doors are fully open, as indicated by the 

Door Open Limit, then a Door Check Fault is detected. 

SF2 Same as SF1. 

DZ1 Car is in the Door Zone, that is, it is within 3” (76 mm) of floor level. 

DZ2 Car is in the Door Zone AND on a Levelling Switch. This allows the Door Contact 

circuit to be jumped to allow the car to re-level with the doors open. 

LIT Energized after the car has stopped at a floor, with the doors closed, on normal/ 

automatic operation. It will turn off the car lights. 

PLP Energized after the car has stopped, to provide power to the door lock. 

10.3 PLC Input Description 

0 Not Used 

1 Not Used 

2 Door Zone. Energized when the car is within 3” (76 mm) of the floor 

3 Car Gate closed. Energized when the Safety String is closed up to terminal 5. This 

indicates the Car door is closed, or the Hall doors are closed (with manual hall 

doors) 

4 Doors Closed. Energized when the Safety String is closed up to terminal 6. This 

indicates the doors are closed and locked, or the car is levelling. 

8 Safety String Input. Used to prevent operation of the doors with the safety string 

open. 

9 SF checking input. This should be the same state as the SF output 

12 VR Input. This is on if there is normal building power. If it goes off, then the car will 

initiate Battery Operated Rescue Initiation Service (BORIS). This returns the car 

to the Main Landing or the bottom landing. 

14 DZ checking input. This should match input 2. 

15 RUN checking input. This should be on whenever the car is running, and should 

be off when it stops. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-49 of 58 



10.4 PLC Output Description 

0 Pro Lock Output. On to unlock a door. The actual door to be unlocked is determined 

by the Zone Switch wired in series with the external signal. 

1 DZ2. Energized when the car is in the Door Zone AND the car is also on a levelling 

switch. This allows the Door Contacts to be bypassed, and the car to re-level with 

the doors open. 

2 In Use Light, LED is energized when the hall landing light is in use. 

3 Future (PWM output) 

7 SF. Energized when the car can run, and held for a brief delay (1.5 seconds) to 

allow the Valve board to power down. 

8 UP. Energized to run the car up. 

9 DN. Energized to run the car down. 

10 FS. Energized to run Fast Speed. 

11 LIT. Energized to turn OFF the car lights. This is energized the preset time after the 

car has stopped, with the doors closed, and is on normal operation at a floor. 

10.5 PLC Lights 

The lights on the PLC CPU will all come on when the power is first applied. The POWER light 

will stay on, and the RUN light will flash during the self-check, then will stay on. The POWER 

and RUN light must both be on for normal operation. 

If the RUN light does not come on, check the Run Switch behind the hinged cover on the left 

of the CPU. The switch should be in the center (REM) position or the left (RUN) position. If 

there is not a specific hardware fault, the CPU can usually be forced into the Run mode by 

turning the switch to the RUN position then back to REM. 

If there is a hardware fault, the DAT will display a fault code. 

A software fault will not cause the PLC to go out of the run mode, but will display a fault in the 

fault log. Refer to the Fault Logging section for description of faults and possible causes. 

10.6 EPROM Memory Module (PN 301158) 

The software/user program can be updated by means of an EPROM Memory Module 

containing the new program. To update the program, turn off the power. Remove the DAT 

or cover plate from the front of the CPU. Plug in the Memory Module. Turn on the Power. 

While the PLC is powering up, the RUN led will flash, indicating the new program is being 

downloaded. This will take a few seconds. When the RUN led remains on solid, turn off the 

power, remove the EPROM Memory Module, replace the DAT or cover plate, and turn the 

power back on. 

C-50 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

10.7 DAT Troubleshooting Techniques 

The DAT can be used to view the current settings of BIT Features (ON/OFF settings) and 

INT Settings (INTEGER values). To change between BIT and INT settings, press the BIT or 

INT button on the bottom row of the DAT. Scroll through the settings using the up or down 

button on the right of the DAT. 

To MONITOR settings continuously, press the F1 button so that the F1 light is ON. NOTE this 

is vital when monitoring the IO using INT30-32, or when looking at the Fault Log (INT40-47). 

If F1 is NOT on, then the value of INT30 can be changed but the values in INT31 and INT32 

will NOT be updated until F1 is turned on. 

To CHANGE settings, the Password setting (INT39) must be set to “2513” AND F1 must be 

ON. If BOTH of these conditions are not met then all settings except the password value 

(INT39) and the IO Pointer (INT30) will be “protected” and will not be changeable. 

Car Top Selector 

Accurate alignment is vital to avoid wear to guides. After placement of the magnets, they can 

be spray painted, so that if a magnet falls off, the hole in the paint is quickly noticed. 

11.0 DUPLINE SYSTEM: ENTERING CALLS fROM THE CONTROLLER 

The car must be on normal operation, not Fire Service, Inspection. Turn on BIT31 to enable 

the test mode. Enter the code in INT28 according to the table below. Add the numbers in the 

“Value” column corresponding to the functions to be turned on. (Example: to energize the 

2nd Ldg Car Call, enter 2; for the 4 th Ldg Rear Car Call, enter 256. To enter several calls, 

add the value for each desired function to determine the correct number to put in INT28. 

Example: for 1st and 2nd landing car calls, enter a value of 3.) 

Value Function 

1 1st Ldg Car Call 

2 2nd Ldg Car Call 

4 3rd Ldg Car Call 

8 4th Ldg Car Call 

16 Front Door Open Button 

32 1st Ldg Rear Car Call 

64 2nd Ldg Rear Car Call 

128 3rd Ldg Rear Car Call 

256 4th Ldg Rear Car Call 

512 Rear Door Open Button 

Press F1. If the Test mode is active the F1 light on the DAT will not go off, and the call(s) will be 

registered. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

While the test mode is active, the hall call buttons are deactivated, and the In Use lights 

will be ON. 

C-51 of 58 



12.0 I/O BOARD REPLACEMENT 

To replace an I/O board, mark all the wires connected to the existing board. Remove the wires. 

Install the new board and connect the wires in the same position as on the old board. 

OEM Assistance 

C-52 of 58 

wHEN REPLACING A BOARD, THE ADDRESSING ON 

THE NEw BOARD MUST MATCH THE OLD BOARD. 

imPortant: if troubleshooting assistance is reQuired from the 

manufacturer, get the following information before calling 

(additional troubleshooting instructions may be given, dePending 

on the nature of the Problem 

• An exact description of the problem 

• The status of all the input and output points 

• The status of the lights on the CPU 

• The stratus of appropriate dupline inputs and outputs 

Program Changes 

CON001.rss = latest program for LRP cpu (with 2nd port) 

CON001S.rss = latest program for LSP cpu (without 2nd port) 

CON001STSSA = latest for LSP with 8 pt input 

The following section lists the changes that are included in program revisions. 

05-02-06 and 10-25-06 (INT29=20, TSSA=20001) 

1) Change Gate Open and Gate Open Rear to hold open signal until close signal (hall doors 

closed) 

12-01-05 (INT29=19, TSSA=19001) 

1) Add Negative Pressure input and feature. Drops calls if down direction set. Prevents down 

run, prevents door open from outside 

05-31-05 (INT29=18, TSSA=18001) 

1) Modify Door Close for no auto close on inspection, rungs 230, 239. 

03-31-05 (INT29=18, TSSA=18001) 

1) TSHTDN (Up Run Timer) fault overrides TDZF (Door Zone Sw Fail) fault, so car that never 

runs up will return to bottom ldg. 

2) Prevent Door Close on Inspection. Int38 bit10 enables door close from run buttons. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

06-01-04 (INT29=17, TSSA=17001) 

1) TSSA shutdown fault modified so that the car will shutdown when it stops at the next floor. 

02-04-04 (INT29=16, TSSA=16001) 

1) URX/E5 and DRX/E6 are disabled on Fire Service, UR/H7 and DR/H8 are still active on 

Fire Service. 

2) Bit47 initiates shutdown defeat for 1 hour only. It must be cycled to reactivate shutdown 

defeat. 

10-06-03 (INT29=15, TSSA=15001) 

1) Fixed Redundancy Fault Check so that a car stopped on a Normal Limit Switch will not trip 

a redundancy fault. 

2) Modified Down Level Fault Counter to prevent fault when the car is being jogged on Constant 

Pressure operation. 

3) Fix GateCR contact in ODCR rung (was GateCL) 

4) Modified In Use Light and Non-Interference circuits to comply with code, and keep In Use 

Lights on and Hall Call Buttons disabled until adjustable time (int15) after the doors have 

closed and the Car Enable Sw is off. 

5) Synchronize TSSA and non-TSSA programs, so the only difference is the IO configuration 

and rungs with timers TRUNOK and TSSA. Bit 34 defeats the TSSA Fault Checking, which 

only is enabled on the TSSA version (CON001STSSA.rss). On standard programs, the 

TSSA Fault Checking is disabled, so the setting has no effect. 

6) Reworded Int14 and Int15 adjustments. Int14 is only used with Single Button Collective 

operation (more than one call can be entered at a time), and it sets the delay before allowing 

a direction reversal. Int15 sets the non-interference delay, which is the delay after the doors 

have closed, and the Car Enable Switch is turned off, before the In Use Light goes out, and 

the Hall Buttons are enabled. 

1-28-03 (INT29=14) 

1) DOB/DOBR removed from EEX/EEXR to prevent shortened Door Time from Car or Hall 

Call Buttons. 

2) Made OINX subject to ICDBYP for redundancy. 

1-14-03 (INT29=13) 

1) Car Call Button for the current floor operates like Door Open Button. Prevents entrapment 

with Car Enable Sw. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-53 of 58 



2) Unlock delay made adjustable (INT7). 

3) Door Time shortened by a new Car Call button being pressed. Prevents short time if button 

is held while car stops. 

4) Short door time if car stops outside door zone. Allows car to continue quickly on CPPB. 

11-14-02 (INT29=12) 

1) Added INT38-bit9 selection. This will enable the Hall Call Buttons when a Car Enable Switch 

is used (BIT36 is ON) and the Car Enable Switch is turned to the “Car” position. 

2) Address assignments when Front and Rear Non-Selective Openings (no front and rear at 

the same landing) were simplified, so that front only addresses may be used for all devices 

EXCEPT Rear Door/Gate Open/Close outputs (A5,A6), Rear Door Open/Close Limit Sw 

Inputs (B7,B8), Rear Car Lanterns (D7,D8). All other Car and Hall devices (including Hall 

Lanterns, Arrival Gongs, Pro-door Open signals, Prolock signals, Hall Door Open and 

Closes signals) may be programmed as front even if they are used at rear openings. 

3) New outputs were added for Nudging and Nudging Buzzer outputs at H5 and H6. These 

will energize if EITHER the front or rear nudging outputs energize. These addresses may 

be used with front and rear systems if only one signal is desired, regardless of the opening 

being used. It is recommended that the H6 address be used for the Nudging Buzzer, as this 

could be a constant address for all systems that do not have selective opening doors. 

10-15-02 (INT29=11) 

1) IES input (Stop Sw) drops car and hall calls. 

2) Running Floor Reset done when car rides off Door Zone, to allow reset inputs through 

Dupline time to set. 

10-10-02 (INT29=10) 

1) Modify FLRERR (rungs 60,190) so that if reset on the fly is disabled, the Floor Error circuit 

does not initiate a shutdown, just logs the fault. Also the check is made as the car rides on 

to the Door Zone or when the car is stopped in the Door Zone. 

10-09-02 (INT29=9) 

1) Fix Hall Call common and In Use Lights when BIT31 is set on, for Car Enable Key Switch. 

C-54 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

10-02-02 (INT29=8) 

1) Change Constant Pressure operation, so that car does not level automatically unless it is in 

the Door Zone. 

2) Modify door operation with Commander doors, so that Door Open Button, or call at the 

same floor will send an open signal to the door. 

9-9-02 (INT29=7) 

1) Disable homing on CPPB. Allow automatic run on shutdown and constant pressure (CPPB) 

if INT38 BIT8 is ON. 

2) Revised RUNOK circuit, which checks the Hall Door Contacts, to allow for No Hall Door 

Contacts, by setting INT37 BIT6. (Note: INT37 BIT3 must also be set ON, to allow the 

external contacts between terminals 4, 5 and 6 in the safety circuit to operate as the Door 

Contacts.) 

3) Added a setting to force the Car Gate open, if there is no demand for the car. The “Park with 

Gate Open” would not open a closed Gate, it would just leave an open gate open. Enabling 

INT37 BIT7 will force the Car Gate to open if there is no demand for the car, and it is on 

normal automatic operation. The Gate will be allowed to close when a call is registered. 

BREAKDOwN Of INT37 


0 1 Enable 2 speed doors 

1 2 Enable power car gate 

2 4 Enable automatic Pro Door 

3 8 Enable GAL manual door locks 

4 16 Enable Commander door 

5 32 Park with car gate closed 

6 64 Disable hall door contacts (also set BIT3) 

7 128 Force car gate open when car is idle 

8 256 Require hall door contact inputs for run 

9 512 Enable door open on hoistway access in door zone 

10 1024 (future) 

11 2048 (future) 

12 4096 (future) 

13 8192 (future) 

14 16384 (future) 

15 32768 (future) 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

C-55 of 58 



BREAKDOwN Of INT38 

5-01-02 


C-56 of 58 

0 1 Prevent door close on Inspection with Car Door Bypass ON 

1 2 Disable Dupline Fault Check 

2 4 Enable Constant Pressure Operation 

3 8 Allow both doors to operate on Battery Backup (not 

recommended) 

4 16 Disable Position Reset while car is running 

5 32 Electric Eye is normally open or is not provided 

6 64 Enable Constant Pressure like Inspection (not recommended) 

7 128 Disable False Down Level feature 

8 256 Allow automatic run on CPPB and shutdown 

9 512 Always enable Hall Call Button Switch/Car Enable Switch 

10 1024 (future) 

11 2048 (future) 

12 4096 (future) 

13 8192 (future) 

14 16384 (future) 

15 32768 (future) 

Approximate Date of implementation – 5/1/2002 

Initial release 

Notes: 

To set the desired features, determine which feature should be on, then add up the values for 

those features and enter that value in INT-37 or INT-38. For example, to enable Power Car 

Gate (value 2) which will park closed (value 32) with Automatic Pro Door (value 4), set INT37 

to 2+32+8= 42 

1. The Electric Eye Input is Normally Closed by default. (Input off to open doors). Change 

back to Normally Open operation by setting the bit-5 in INT38 (add “32” to value in INT38). 

If the Electric Eye Input is NOT USED, then this setting MUST be turned ON. 

2. To reset to the Factory Default settings, set the number of landings to “0”, then the power 

is cycled. All BIT and INT settings are reset to the factory default. They must now be set for 

the particular job requirements. 

3. To be able to adjust settings or features, the value in INT-39 must be set to the proper value, 

AND F1 light on the DAT must be on. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

13.0 CONTROLLER MAINTENANCE 

13.1 CPU Exchange 

To swap out the CPU board: 

1) Turn off the power to the controller. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

MAKE SURE THE POwER IS Off BEfORE CONNECTING 

OR DISCONNECTING ANY CONNECTORS, ADDRESS 

JUMPERS OR CABLES ON THE CPU OR I/O BOARDS. 

2) Push the black tab at the top left of the CPU to push the CPU out of the connector on the 

right of the base. 

3) Slide the CPU to the left about 1” (25 mm), then lift and pull it out. 

4) Replace the new CPU in a similar manner, sliding it into place. 

5) Push the CPU into the connector firmly by carefully so as not to damage the connectors. 

6) Turn on the power. 

13.2 EPROM Memory Upload 

wARNING: If YOU NEED TO CHANGE THE EPROM PROGRAM CHIP ON THE CPU 

BOARD, MAKE SURE YOU READ THE INSTRUCTIONS AND KNOw ExACTLY HOw TO 

INSTALL THE NEw CHIP. PLUGGING THE EPROM IN UPSIDE-DOwN MAY DAMAGE 

YOUR CHIP. STATIC ELECTRICITY CAN DAMAGE THE EPROM, SO AVOID TOUCHING 

THE PINS ON THE CHIP, AND GROUND YOURSELf (BY TOUCHING THE CONTROLLER 

CABINET) BEfORE TOUCHING THE CHIP OR THE CONTROLLER. DO NOT ExPOSE 

THE EPROM PROGRAM CHIP TO BRIGHT LIGHT, AND DO NOT REMOVE THE LABEL 

OVER THE EPROM PROGRAM CHIP wINDOw. 

To upload the EPROM memory chip on the CPU board: 

1) Turn off power to the controller. 

2) Remove the DAT or cover from the CPU. 

3) Insert the new EPROM chip by orienting it properly, in the area in the middle of the CPU. 

C-57 of 58 



4) Do not apply power until the orientation of the chip has been checked. Also verify that ALL 

pins are properly in the socket, and that none of them have been bent out of place. 

5) Turn on the power. When the Run light stops blinking, the new program has been 

downloaded. 

6) Turn off the power, remove the memory chip. 

7) Replace the DAT or cover panel, and turn the power back on. 

14.0 fREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 

Q. Are the Reset Magnets necessary when using a pulsing selector? 

Yes. 

The reset magnets are required at every landing except the bottom landing, as shown 

on the car top selector installation sheet, to establish or reset the floor position at each 

landing. 

Q. How Do I Reset All Settings and features Back to the Original Values? 

1) Available. Check each setting individually. 

2) If the number of landings is set to “0”, then the power is cycled, all BIT and INT 

settings are reset to the data in file N12 (which can be viewed and changed using 

the programming software). 

Q. How do I check the current values of the settings and features? 

1) Press BIT or INT on the DAT. 

2) Press the Up or Down button to scroll through the settings. 

Q. why is the DAT Display blank? 

The LCD Display goes blank after the DAT has been idle for a preset time. The “sleep” 

mode is indicated by a flashing cursor on the left of the display. Press ESC to restore the 

display. 

If the screen does not activate, confirm that the PLC has power. Unplug the DAT and plug 

it back in to reset it (this can be done with the power on) 

C-58 of 58 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

APPENDIx D 

CAB TYPES 

AND GATE HANDING 

D-1 of 2 



VPL GATE AND LATCH LOCATIONS 

COMMANDER DOOR OPERATOR SWING SELECTIONS 

RIGHT HAND SWING OUT 

(PN 300021) 

LEFT HAND SWING OUT 

(PN 300020) 

D-2 of 2 

GATE HANDING 

PLATFORM GATE LOCATION LAYOUT 

DOOR LOCK 

DOOR LOCK 

PLATFORM PLATFORM 

MACHINE HOUSING 

COMMANDER 

COMMANDER 

ENTRANCE WAY 

Left Latch Right Latch 

ENTRANCE WAY 

SIDE C 

SIDE A 

DOOR LATCH DOOR LATCH 

RIGHT HAND SWING IN 

(PN 300022) 

� � 

HINGE 

SIDE 

LEFT HAND SWING IN 

(PN 300023) 

SIDE B 

DOOR LOCK 

DOOR LOCK 

COMMANDER 

COMMANDER 

ENTRANCE WAY ENTRANCE WAY 

ENTRANCE WAY 

ENTRANCE WAY 

� USED FOR ELEVATORS AND LIFTS 

VPL PLATFORM TYPES 

CAB DOOR AND LATCH LOCATIONS 

CAB DOOR LATCH SIDE 

CAB DOOR LOCATION LAYOUT 

LH TWO SPEED DOOR 

HOISTWAY HOISTWAY 

RAIL WALL 

GATE SIDE 

a 

GATE SIDE 

c 

Left Latch Right Latch 

SIDE C 

SIDE A 

DOOR LATCH DOOR LATCH 

machine housing 


HINGE 

SIDE 

Type 2R 

platform 

Type 1R 

platform 

Type 1L 

platform 


SIDE B 

Type 2L 

platform 


ENTRANCE WAY ENTRANCE WAY 

DOOR LATCH 

ENTRANCE WAY 

NOTE: 2 SPEED DOORS W/ LH LATCH STACK RIGHT, W/RH LATCH STACK LEFT 

ELEVATOR CAB TYPES 

GATE SIDE 

level 1 

c 

GATE SIDE 

level 1 

a 

GATE SIDE 

level 1 

GATE SIDE 

level 1 

GATE SIDE 

b 

b 

GATE SIDE 

Type 4 

platform 



Type 3 

platform 

GATE SIDE GATE SIDE 

a 

c 

©Concord Elevator Inc. 

(Rev. 09/04-2) 

NOTE: ALL HANDING IS DETERMINED BY LOOKING INTO THE HOISTWAY. 

©Concord Elevator Inc. 

(Rev. 09/04-2) 

LH Door Latch & Folding Gate RH Door Latch & Folding Gate 

(Gate stacks RIGHT) 

(Gate stacks LEFT) 

NOTE: ALL HANDING IS DETERMINED BY LOOKING INTO THE HOISTWAY. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

APPENDIx E 

HANDS fREE TELEPHONE 

INSTALLATION AND 

PROGRAMMING 

INSTRUCTIONS 

E-1 of 14 



1) Open the COP to access the wiring. 

2) On the Cab Control Wall, mount the Hands-Free Telephone Panel over the Telephone Box 

and secure with provided hardware. 

2) If required, connect the microphone 

wires (yellow/grey) to the Telephone 

Junction Board terminal block J10, 

position 5. Refer to Figure 1. 

3) If required, connect the speaker 

wires (orange/purple) to Telephone 

Junction Terminal Block J10, position 

2. 

4) If required, connect wire PB1 (blue/ 

blue) to the Telephone Junction 

Board terminal block J10, position 

2 and to the Phone Access Button 

contact block lower pins.. 

5) Locate the black Telephone Cable 

and cut off the connector. If required, 

strip the cable and cut off the black 

and yellow wires. 

6) Connect the red and green wires from 

the Telephone Cable to terminal T10 

pins 6 and 7 on on the Car Station 

Junction Board. Refer to Figure 2. 

7) Connect the pre-terminated end of 

the black Telephone Cable (with the 

standard phone jack connector) to 

J1 on the Phone Junction Board. 

8) Remove backing and attach the 

Programming Keypad to the inside 

of the panel and program using the 

programming instructions on the 

next pages. 

E-2 of 14 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

figure 1 Phone Junction Board - Terminal J10 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

Connect the red and green wires from the Telephone 

Cable to available terminal T10 pins 6 and 7 on the Car 

Station Junction Board as shown 

figure 2 Car Station Junction Board 

E-3 of 14 



E-4 of 14 

AE-150 E.M. Hands-Free 

Autodialer Phone 

PROGRAMMING GUIDE 

Part no. 000658 16-m12-2009 AE-150 E.M. Hands-Free Autodialer Phone - Programming 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

2 

Unless otherwise specified, Savaria Concord Lifts Inc., accepts no responsibility for changes, labour, or 

replacements incurred from this bulletin 

Standard notations 

The following notations may be used throughout this guide to emphasize important safety information, mechanical 

concerns, and other important information. Savaria Concord Lifts Inc. recommends that you review and follow all 

of these messages. 

DANGER 

WARNING 

CAUTION 

CAUTION 

NOTE 

AE-150 E.M. Hands-Free Autodialer Phone - Programming Part no. 000658 16-m12-2009 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

Danger messages indicate an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, results in death or serious 

injury. All danger messages feature a standard ISO safety alert symbol followed by the signal word Danger in 

capitalized black lettering on a red background. 

Warning messages indicate a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or 

serious injury. All warning messages feature a standard ISO safety alert symbol followed by the signal word 

Warning in capitalized black lettering on a dark yellow background. 

Caution messages indicate a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or 

serious injury. All caution messages feature a standard ISO safety alert symbol followed by the signal word 

Caution in capitalized black lettering on a yellow background. 

Caution messages that do not include the ISO safety alert symbol indicate a potentially hazardous situation 

for the machine only, which, if not avoided, could result in damage to the machine. All caution messages 

include the signal word Caution in capitalized black lettering on a yellow background. 

Note messages provide information, such as reminders, general information about a previous statement, or 

additional guidelines that do not fit into the flow of the preceding text. All note messages include the signal 

word Note in capitalized white lettering on a blue background. 

General 

This guide is available through Savaria Concord Lifts 

Inc., for elevators that include the AE-150 E.M. Hands- 

Free Autodialer Phone. 

Please contact Savaria Concord Lifts Inc. for details 

regarding ordering information. 

For technical support, please call (800) 791-7999. 

Hazards and cautions 

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD 

Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. 

Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. 

Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. To prevent 

electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are 

OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level. 

WARNING 

SUDDEN MOVEMENT HAZARD 

System may start unexpectedly upon application of power, resulting 

in Death or serious injury. 

Clear all personnel from the drive, motor, and machine area 

before applying power. Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys, and 

machine loads before applying power to the drive. Unpredictable 

equipment operation may result in death or serious injury. 

WARNING 

FIRE HAZARD 

Do not use an improper voltage source. 

Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. 

Verify that the rated voltage matches the voltage of the incoming 

power supply before applying power. 

WARNING 

CRUSH HAZARD 

Never connect or disconnect the motor from the 

controller while the controller is outputting voltage. 

Improper equipment sequencing could result 

in damage to the controller. 

Disclaimer 

Follow the instruction steps to ensure your safety while 

programming the AE-150 phone. Failure to follow 

instructions renders the Limited Warranty null and void. 

In addition, any party installing the product who deviates 

from the installation instructions agrees to indemnify, 

save, and hold harmless the manufacturer from any and 

all loss, liability, or damage that may occur as a result of 

the deviation. 

About this document 

This document describes the Agintronic Controls Ltd. 

AE-150 E.M Hands-Free Autodialer Phone and its 

programming; in addition, it includes a workflow 

description and programming procedures for the 

following activities: 

• local programming 

• remote programming. 

E-5 of 14 



E-6 of 14 

Audience 

This document is for the following users: 

• dealers 

• installers 

• test engineers/technicians 

• maintenance engineers 

• remote emergency operators. 

Autodialer description 

The purpose of the AE-150 E.M. Autodialer telephone 

design is to establish emergency contact between the 

passenger inside an elevator cab and a service person in 

case of an emergency incident. 

Workflow 

There are two sets of telephone numbers; they provide 

redundancy in case one number is unreachable; for best 

results, program both numbers into telephone memory. 

If there is no connection on the eighth ring, the phone 

dials the second number. 

If there is a busy line signal after the first time primary 

phone number dial attempt, a 30-second interval occurs 

before primary phone number redial. 

If the phone number successfully rings, but there is no 

answer, the Autodialer automatically redials up to a 

maximum of four times. 

The Autodialer plays a pre-recorded message to direct 

the person who answers the call to begin the 

conversation or play a pre-recorded location message by 

pressing a key from a touch-tone phone keypad. 

If the called party side does not start the conversation 

within a programmed amount of time, the phone 

assumes the called party is an answering machine; the 

Autodialer treats the call as unanswerable. 

The Autodialer speaker uses an additional power 

supply that ensures sound volume and clarity is greater 

than that of a speaker-phone with only phone line power. 

An attached, rechargeable battery pack keeps the unit 

working during a power outage event. 

Program the Autodialer phone from either the unit 

keypad or remotely from a touch-tone phone, if 

equipped; to do so, ensure the unit phone connection to 

a telephone line is valid. The Autodialer answers 

incoming calls after a predetermined number of rings; 

the number of rings is programmable. 

Revision history of this guide 

15-m09-2008 – Initial release 

16-m12-2009 – Updated Step 6 on page 8 to include 

two-way communication option. 



PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

3

4 

Board layout 

Figure 1 describes the Autodialer board layout. 

Figure 1 

Auto dialer board layout 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

8 

3“ Speaker 

Telephone 

Line 

24V AC/DC 

Specifications 

Refer to Table 1 and Table 2 for AE-150 E.M. autodialer phone specifications: 

Table 1 

Autodialer phone specifications 

Feature Parameter 

Battery pack Ni-MH rechargable, 5-9V, 200MAh 

Speakers 8 or 16 Ohm, 0.5W, diameter 3 inches 

Microphone Electret condenser, 100-9000Hz, -42+-2 dB 

LED pilot light 5mm, red, Vf=1.8-2.2V, IF-20mA max 

Table 2 

Autodialer phone specifications 

Push 

Button 

On and off hook V/C Parameter 

On hook voltage 42-55V typical 48V 

Off hook voltage 6.6-12V typical 6.5V 

On hook current


E-8 of 14 

List of steps in this guide 

Table 3 lists all steps found in this guide. 

Table 3 

Steps in this guide 

Step Page 

Adding a primary telephone number 5 

Adding a secondary telephone number 6 

Setting the call duration 6 

Recording and verifying an emergency 

message 

Setting the number of rings before Autodialer 

answers 

Enabling/disabling outgoing automated 

message, quick message playback and 

two-way communication following 

dealer-recorded location message 

Remotely accessing programming mode 8 

Remotely programming the Autodialer 9 

. 

CAUTION 

This phone requires a separate, dedicated phone line. 

Do not use a switched phone line. 

7 

7 

8 

Step 1 

Adding a primary telephone number 

Purpose 

To add a primary telephone number to the Autodialer. 

Considerations 

Program the phone from the circuit board keypad. 

Include an alternate number and test each variable that 

you enter; the phone must work as intended once all programming 

is complete. 

Requirements 

Ensure to meet the following requirements 

before programming: 

• power is on 

• auxiliary power supply is on or backup battery is connected 

and charged 

• phone line connection is complete. 


Step 

1 Press and release the START key. 

The phone enters program mode. 

2 Wait for the beep sound then press and release the M1 

key. 

3 Enter the primary emergency . 

4 Press the STOP key. 

The phone exits programming mode and emits a verbal 

''parameter accepted'' response. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

5

6 

Step 2 

Adding a secondary telephone number 

Purpose 

To add a secondary telephone number to 

the Autodialer. 

Requirements 

Ensure to meet the following requirements before programming: 


• auxiliary power supply is on or backup battery is connected 

and charged 


Step 



2 Wait for the beep sound then press and release the M2 

key. 

3 Enter the secondary emergency . 






PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

If there is no secondary phone number available; use the primary 

phone number as the secondary phone number. In all cases, 

program both for M1 and for M2. 

Step 3 

Setting the call duration 

Purpose 

To set the call duration time for the Autodialer. 


Certain phone lines do not provide a call termination 

signal should the called party signal connection either 

hang up or drop. 

Always program an appropriate call duration time to 

ensure the calling party can initiate a second emergency 

call should the called party phone line not provide a call 

termination signal. 

Requirements 




• ensure auxiliary power supply is on or backup battery 

is connected and charged 


Step 



2 Wait for the beep sound then press and release the 

SET key. 

3 Enter the ID Number 0. Press SET. 

4 Enter the maximum call duration in seconds. 




NOTE 

The default call duration setting is 180 seconds (3 minutes). 

NOTE 

The call duration limit is up to 6000 seconds, 

programmable. 

NOTE 

Unlimited call duration is achieved by setting the call 

duration to 0 seconds. 

E-9 of 14 



E-10 of 14 

Step 4 

Recording and verifying 

an emergency message 

Purpose 

To record and to verify an emergency message. 


Emergency messages should include contact information 

such as a location address. 

The maximum time to record is normally 15 seconds; 

this is enough time to provide a name and location. 

The emergency contact information should be known 

to the elevator emergency operator; the emergency operator 

should have additional information about the elevator 

location, such as emergency access information. 

Requirements 







Step 




SET key. 


9 key. 


SET key. 

Wait for the beep sound and the phone is in 

recording mode. 

5 Record an Emergency Message. 

6 Once the recording is complete, press and release the 

STOP key to exit record mode. 



7 To listen to the message, press and release the following 

keys in sequence: 

[Start | SET | 8 | SET| 

8 Press STOP to quit message listening mode. 

Step 5 

Setting the number of 

rings before Autodialer answers 

Purpose 

To set Autodialer to answer remote calls to program the 

dialer from another phone. 


The Autodialer does not answer incoming calls when 

set for 0 rings. 

The manufacturer default setting is 3 rings. 

Requirements 








Step 




SET key. 


3 key. 


SET key. 

5 Type the number of rings before Autodialer answers an 

incoming phone call. 

6 Press the STOP key and wait for the verbal 

acknowledgement. 

The Autodialer exits programming mode. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

7

8 

Step 6 

Enabling/disabling outgoing automated 

message, quick message playback and 

two-way communication following 

dealer-recorded location message 

Purpose 

To enable or disable the outgoing automated message, 

enable quick message playback, or enable two-way 

communication following a dealer-recorded location 

message. 


The default value for the outgoing message is enabled. 

The two-way communication option is available on 

units shipped since January, 2009. 

Step 


The phone enters program mode and responds with two 

beeps. 

2 Press and release the SET key. 

3 Press 7. 

4 Press SET. 

5 Press “See Notes”. 




PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

NOTE 

Press 0 to enable outgoing automated message. 

The outgoing message is enabled. 

NOTE 

Press 1 to disable outgoing automated message. 

The outgoing message is disabled. 

NOTE 

Press 2 to disable outgoing automated message and autodialing. 

The phone dials out but the message does not play; the phone dials 

once, but hangs up if there is no connection; the phone does not 

attempt to redial. 

NOTE 

Press 3 to enable quick automated message playback option. 

The quick message playback overrides any delays in message playback 

and forces immediate playback upon connection. Use Quick message 

playback option in conjunction with “0” to enable playback. 

NOTE 

Press 4 to enable two-way communication following playback of 

dealer-recorded location message. 

The called party hears a location message (recorded by the dealer). 

Following the message, two-way communication is enabled. 

Step 7 

Remotely accessing 

programming mode 

Purpose 

To remotely access the Autodialer 

programming mode. 


Program the phone from any remote 

location that includes a touch tone phone, including a 

cell phone; ensure to include an alternate number, even 

if it is the same as the primary number, and to test each 

variable that you enter. The phone must work as 

intended once all programming is complete. 

Requirements 




• phone line connection is complete 

Step 

1 Dial the Autodialer phone number. 

The Autodialer phone answers; a verbal message asks you to 

either press 1 to connect the call or 2 to hear the message. 

2 Type ''**''. 

A verbal message indicating remote programming is initiated, 

plays; you are in program mode. 

E-11 of 14 



E-12 of 14 

Step 8 

Remotely programming the Autodialer 

Purpose 

To remotely modify the Autodialer parameters. 


The remote program feature is available for models with firmware 

Version 3.0 or greater. All models ship with firmware equal to or 

greater than Version 3.0. 

Requirements 

Ensure to meet the following requirements before programming: 



Step 

1 While in program mode, refer to Table 4 to access each Access ID 

type and enter a numerical range or set the enable disable parameter 

using the appropriate values. 

2 To set more than one parameter type during one remote session, wait 

for the verbal parameter accepted message then enter the new or 

additional parameter. 

3 Enter ''*#'' then enter the parameter ID number then ''#'' only 

followed by the value and finally ''##''. 

*# - parameter ID number - # - value - ## 

A verbal message accepted message plays. 

NOTE 

If programming, and you decide to back out of a 

command sequence, type ''**'' to return to initial 

program mode where you can begin a new 

program parameter sequence. 

Table 4 

List of programming ID’s including value ranges 

Parameter Type Access 

ID 

Maximum conversion 

time 

Primary phone 

number 

Secondary phone 

number 

Number of rings 

before Autodialer 

answers 

Numerical 

Range 

0 30-60000 

(seconds) 

Manufacturer 

Notes 

Note 3 

1 0-25 (digits) Note 1 and 

Note 2 

2 0-25 (digits) Note 1 and 

Note 2 

3 0-9 (rings) Note 4 

Phone ID 99 0000-9999 Note 5 

Note: To program many parameters at once, 

wait for the verbal acknowledgement 

after entering each parameter, then 

repeat step three for the next 

parameter to program. 

Note 1: Valid entry is any combination of 

digit "0"-"9". The "*" key is also a 

valid entry, which stands for 

approximately a 1 second pause. 

Note 2: If both the primary and secondary 

phone numbers are empty - unprogrammed 

or pause only - the 

phone works as a ring-down phone 

only, meaning, the phone in the 

elevator cannot dial out which 

defeats the emergency 

call function. 

Note 3: Manufacture default setting is 180 

seconds 

(3 minutes). 

Note 4: Manufacture default setting is 3 rings, 

to disable ring down function, 

enter 0. 

Note 5: Manufacture default setting 

is 0000. 

Note 6: Remote program feature only 

available for models with firmware 

Ver 3.0 or up. All Concord models 

shipped are equal to or greater than 

version 3. 



PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

9


PN 000581 (15-m04-2010) 

APPENDIx f 

ORION CAB ASSEMBLY 

HARDwARE PRE-PACK 

KIT PN 255001 

F-1 of 2 



102205 

Hex Nut 

¼” - 20 QTY 100 

Use with 101836 

101213 

Lock washer 

¼” - 20 QTY 100 


101196 

Flat Washer 

¼” -20 qTY 100+ 


Cab Assemby and Base Plate to Cab Wall Spacer 

101836 

Hex Head Cap Screw 

¼” - 20 x 1” qTY 100 

Cab Wall and Ceiling Assembly 

F-2 of 2 

101222 

Lock washer 

#8 QTY 4 


101206 

flat washer 

#8 QTY 4 


101140 

Phillips Head Machine Screw 

8/32” - ½” QTY 4 

Control Wall Wire Duct from Cab Ceiling to 

Car Junction Board 

101138 

Phillips Head Machine Screw 

8/32” - ⅜” QTY 14 

Control Wall Wire Duct from Cab Ceiling to 

Car Junction Board 

101120 

Spring Nut 

⅜” - 16 QTY 8 

Operator Support Bracket to Cab 

Ceiling 


100700 

Flat Head Phillips 

wood Screw 

#10 - ¾” qTY 4 

Cab Base Plate 

102186 

Hex Nut 

⅜” - 16 QTY 10 


102191 

Lock washer 

⅜” QTY 18 

Use with 102197 and 

101120 

102188 

Flat Washer 

⅜” QTY 18 

Use with 102197 and 

101120 

102197 


⅜” - 16 x 1” QTY 10 

Operator Support Bracket to Cab Ceiling, 

Cab Stabilizer Bracket to Cab Ceiling 

101106 

Hex Nut 

½” QTY 4 


102193 

Lock washer 

½” QTY 4 


102189 

Flat Washer 

½” qTY 4 


10220 


½” - 13 x 1 ½” qTY 4 

Northern Doors Header Plate to Operator 

Support Bracket 

100544 

Hex Nut 

5/16”- 18 QTY 10 


102190 

Lock washer 

5/16” QTY 10 


102747 

Flat Washer 

5/16” QTY 10 


104596 

Carriage Bolt 

5/16” x 1 ¼” QTY 10 

2 Speed door Operator to 

Cab Header Bracket 

101113 

Hex Nut 

#6 QTY 20 


NOTE: The above illustrations are not to scale. 

101220 

Lock washer 

#6 QTY 20 


101205 

Flat Washer 

#6 qTY 20 


102180 

Pan Head Phillips Machine Screw 

#6-32 x 1” qTY 20 

Light Curtain to Strike Jamb and Fast Door 


PN 000581 (15-m04-2010) 

©Concord Elevator Inc. (PN 301442 rev. 07-05-2)


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

APPENDIx G 

NEw JERSEY fIRE 

SERVICE SwITCH 

wIRING 

G-1 of 4 



NEW jERSEy FIRE SERVICE KEySWITCH WIRING 

Required Parts 

✔ NJ Hall Station Fire Service Keyswitch (PN 301507) 

✔ NJ Car Station Fire Service Keyswitch (PN 301506) 

Hall Station Keyswitch wiring 

1) Disconnect all power to the lift. 

2) Remove the existing Fire Service Keyswitch from the hall station. Note that OFF (I1) is not 

connected on the NJ Keyswitches. 

3) Connect the wiring from the Dupline board to the NJ Hall Station Keyswitch (marked BYP) 

as follows. Refer to Figures 1, 2 and 3. 

G-2 of 4 

a) Connect terminals A in series to D- on the Dupline board (white wire). DO NOT cut the 

white wire. 

b) Connect terminal B to I2 on the Dupline board for BYPASS. 

c) Connect terminal C to I3 on the Dupline board for ON. 

BYPASS (N/C) 

ON (N/C) 

A A 

B C 

to d- (common) 

figure 1 NJ Hall Station Keyswitch 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

figure 2 Hall Station Dupline Wiring 

Car Station Keyswitch wiring 

1) Disconnect all power to the lift. 

2) Remove the existing Fire Service Keyswitch from the car station. 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010) 

figure 3 4 IN/4 OUT Dupline Board 

3) Connect the wiring from the Dupline board to the NJ Car Station Keyswitch (marked OFF/ 

ON) as follows. Refer to Figures 3, 4 and 5. 

a) Connect terminals A in series to D- on the Dupline board (white wire). DO NOT cut the 

white wire. 

b) Connect terminal B to I4 on the Dupline board for ON. 

c) Connect terminal C to I3 on the Dupline board for HOLD. 

d) Connect terminal D to I2 on the Dupline board for OFF. 

ON (N/C) 

HOLD (N/C) 

OFF (N/C) 

A A A 

B C D 

to d- (common) 

figure 4 NJ Car Station Keyswitch 

G-3 of 4 



G-4 of 4 

figure 5 Car Station Dupline Wiring 


PN 000581 (18-m06-2010)

107 Alfred Kuehne Blvd. 

Brampton, ON L6T 4K3 

Canada 

Toll free (800) 791-7999 

fax (905) 791-2222

ORION Commercial 'LULA' Elevator - Advanced Lift Solutions

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?